Operating Instructions
Network Disk Recorder
WJ-NX300K
WJ-NX300K/G
Model No.
Network
Disk Re
corder WJ
-NX300
Before attempting to connect or operate this product,
please read these instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
The model number is abbreviated in some descriptions in this manual.
CONTENTS
Preface........................................................................4
About the user manuals..........................................4
Abbreviations..........................................................4
About the settings and operation of the
recorder ..................................................................4
Restrictions when using this product......................5
Before using this product............................................7
Motion detection (VMD) function............................7
Time display of recorded images............................7
Response to the mouse operations........................7
Black screen displayed when playing recorded
images.....................................................................8
Recording operation................................................8
Event type...............................................................8
Extra function..........................................................8
Configure the basic settings [Basic setup]..................9
Display the basic setup pages................................9
Set up date & time and language
[Date/Language]......................................................9
Camera setup [Camera]........................................12
Set up recording/events [REC & event].................35
Configure the settings relating to monitors
[Monitor]....................................................................46
Set up the main monitor [Main monitor]................46
Configure the settings relating to sub monitors
[Sub monitor].........................................................48
Configure other settings relating to monitors
[Advanced setup]..................................................49
Configure the settings relating to network [Network]....50
Configure the basic network settings [Basic]........50
Procedure to register information for the
"Viewnetcam.com" service...................................52
Configure the settings relating to the mail
notification [e-Mail]................................................54
Configure the Panasonic alarm protocol settings
[Panasonic alarm protocol]....................................55
Configure the settings relating to NTP/SNMP
synchronization [NTP/SNMP]................................56
Configure the settings relating to the user
management [User management].............................57
Configure the basic settings relating to user
management [Basic]..............................................57
Register, edit or delete the user information
[User registration]..................................................59
Edit the administrator information [Administrator
setup]....................................................................61
Register, edit or delete host [Host registration].....62
Configure the settings relating to maintenance
[Maintenance]............................................................63
Check the system information such as the version
[System information].............................................63
Confirm the hard disk drive information
[HDD information]..................................................64
Configure the settings and operations relating to
the system [System management]........................66
Register the licenses for the recorder and the
additional camera [Registration of license]...........68
Manage the hard disk drives [HDD management]....71
How to display the "HDD management" page......71
Check the hard disk drive information
[General]................................................................72
Format the hard disk drives [Format HDD]...........72
About the removal process and the link process
of hard disk drives.................................................73
About the change of the HDD operational
mode.....................................................................74
Set the recording group
[Recording group setup]........................................75
Configure the settings relating to the extra functions
[Extra function]..........................................................76
Lists of the setting items (Setup menu).....................77
About the error logs and the network logs................92
Error logs...............................................................92
About the network log...............................................96
Operation window.....................................................97
Main monitor (A monitor to display the live image,
the playback image and the setup menu).............97
Sub monitor (monitor for display of live images
only).....................................................................101
Basic operations......................................................102
Logout.................................................................102
Login operation at startup.......................................103
Monitor live images.................................................104
About the operation panel...................................104
Switch between control screen and wide view
screen..................................................................109
1-screen display..................................................110
Display images from cameras on a
multiscreen..........................................................111
Use digital zoom..................................................112
Correct the fisheye image...................................113
Operate the camera................................................114
Camera control panel..........................................114
Panning/Tilting....................................................116
Zooming..............................................................116
Move to home position.......................................117
Focus adjustment................................................117
Iris (brightness) adjustment.................................117
Auto mode...........................................................118
Register camera preset positions.......................119
Move camera preset positions............................119
AUX operation.....................................................120
Wiper operation...................................................120
Register home position.......................................121
Execute auto back focus.....................................121
Set up mask areas...............................................122
2
Move to preset positions.....................................168
Auto mode/AUX/Wiper........................................169
Event function.........................................................170
Action to be taken upon an event occurrence....170
Cancel the alarm action......................................171
Cancel the error action........................................171
Play recorded images..............................................172
Play image recorded at a designated
date & time..............................................................174
Search and play recording events
(REC event search)..................................................175
Motion detection search and playback
(VMD search)...........................................................177
Copy recorded images............................................179
Download recorded images currently being
played......................................................................181
Check a list of copied recorded images..................183
Play back the copied/downloaded images on a
PC............................................................................185
To play recorded images copied on the media
device..................................................................185
Play recorded images downloaded using a web
browser...............................................................185
Install the viewer software...................................186
Uninstall the viewer software..............................186
How to use the viewer software..........................187
Setup.......................................................................191
Basic operations.................................................191
Configure the settings.........................................191
Set the web browser [Web browser]...................192
Update the firmware............................................192
Notification by e-mail..............................................193
Alarm mail...........................................................193
Warning mail........................................................193
Addendum...............................................................195
In combination with the network microphone.....195
Concurrent user license function........................201
Troubleshooting.......................................................202
Glossary..................................................................207
Zoom/Focus adjustment.....................................122
Initial position setup............................................123
Event function.........................................................124
Action to be taken upon an event occurrence....124
Stop buzzer beeping...........................................125
Cancel the alarm action......................................126
Cancel the error action........................................126
Record images........................................................127
Record images (Schedule recording)..................127
Emergency recording..........................................128
Play recorded images..............................................129
Playback operation panel....................................131
Play images from a designated point......................134
Play image recorded at a designated
date & time..........................................................134
Play the latest recorded image............................135
Playback by designating a timeline.....................136
Search and play.......................................................138
Play images selected from logs (Log search)......138
Display thumbnail screen and paly back
(Thumbnail search)..............................................139
Search and play recorded images triggered by
motion detection (VMD search)...........................140
Copy recorded images............................................143
Format USB medium...........................................146
Play back copied images with this recorder...........147
List of operation items.............................................149
Configure the network settings...............................152
Configure the network settings of the
recorder...............................................................152
Configure the network settings of the PC...........152
Network security of the recorder.............................155
The security function of the recorder..................155
Enhance network security...................................155
Display the operation window.................................157
About the operation window...................................158
Top Page.............................................................158
Control panel.......................................................159
Camera selection panel.......................................160
Setup panel.........................................................161
Status display area..............................................162
Download operation area....................................163
[CAM] tab............................................................163
[HDD] tab.............................................................164
Monitor live images.................................................165
Display images on a 1-screen.............................165
Display images on a 4-screen (multiscreen)........166
Operate the camera................................................167
Panning/Tilting....................................................167
Zooming..............................................................167
Focus adjustment................................................168
Iris (brightness) adjustment.................................168
Register preset positions....................................168
3
Preface
About the user manuals
There are 4 manuals provided for the WJ-NX300K, WJ-NX300K/G as follows.
Installation Guide:
Contains procedures how to install/connect this product, and descriptions of easy
configurations.
Important Information (PDF):
Contains preface, precautions, and major operating controls and their functions and
specifications.
Operating Instructions (PDF: this document):
Contains descriptions of how to operate this product with a PC. Make sure to read
them when installing the recorder.
Quick Reference Guide: Contains descriptions of how to configure the basic settings and how to use the major
functions.
Adobe® Reader® is required to read the PDF files (the setup instructions and the operating instructions) on the
provided CD-ROM.
When Adobe® Reader® is not installed on the PC, download the latest Adobe® Reader® from the Adobe web
site and install it.
"NX300" shown in the instructions and illustrations used in these operating instructions indicate the WJ-NX300K,
WJ-NX300K/G.
Refer to "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM for further information about the optional dedicated software,
compatible network cameras (hereinafter, cameras) and their versions.
Refer to the Panasonic support website (https://security.panasonic.com/support) for latest information about
the compatible cameras and functions to be added or changed by firmware upgrade.
The external appearance in the document may differ from the actual product within no influence range on operation
due to improvement of the product.
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in this manual.
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 is described as Windows 8.
Microsoft® Windows® 7 is described as Windows 7.
Windows® Internet Explorer® 11 is described as Internet Explorer.
Network cameras are described as cameras.
About the settings and operation of the recorder
•Professional knowledge and experience with the network, hard disk and network camera are required for
the setting and operation of the recorder.
•The recorder can be operated using the provided mouse connected to the USB port on the front side of the
recorder and the soft keyboard. Refer to "Basic operations" of Installation Guide for the operation of the
mouse and the soft keyboard.
•The camera settings are automatically done in accordance with recording settings of the recorder once the
camera is registered in the recorder. If you directly change settings related to image and audio of the camera registered in the recorder, the settings may differ from those of the recorder or some functions may not
work properly.
•It is also possible to perform settings and some operations of the recorder from the web browser. Refer to "Lists
of the setting items" on page 77 for setting items via the web browser and "List of operation items" on page
149 for operational items via the web browser. Refer to page 157 and following pages for the operation.
•This documents is sub headed in each applicable page such as "Setup via recorder's main monitor",
"Operation via recorder's main monitor", "Setup on browser" and "Operation via PC web browser".
•This document explains settings and operation of the recorder using 16 cameras as examples.
4
Restrictions when using this product
When using this product, some functions have the following restrictions. Before using this product, keep the
following in mind.
When displaying live images from the
camera
When recording images
•The actual time of recording trigger (event occurrence time, start time of the schedule recording,
etc.) and the recording start time (time displayed
on the recording event list) may not exactly be the
same.
•When pre-event recording is set to be performed,
the recording may not be performed as the set
duration.
•If the frame rate is set to switch during the event
recording or the emergency recording, it may take
a few seconds to switch the rate depending on
the refresh cycle interval.
•Black screen may be displayed for the first several
seconds (*) when the following operations are performed while displaying live images.
• When live images are displayed (by switching
camera, etc.)
• When image is zoomed in or out
When playing recorded images
•First several seconds (*) may be skipped when the
following operations are performed while playing
recorded images.
• When cameras are switched
• When image is zoomed in or out (When zooming into/out of a paused recorded image, an
image occurring several seconds before or
after the displayed image may be zoomed in.)
• When the playback button is clicked again
while playing images
• When the first frame is displayed by starting
the frame by frame playback during pausing
•Playback may be performed in several seconds
intervals (*) when the following operations are performed. Refer to the description of operations
during playback on pages 131 and 173 for how
to control playback.
• Reverse playback
• Fast playback/Fast reverse playback
• Reverse frame playback
•When playing images by designating date & time,
playback may start from a point several seconds*
before/after the specified time or from the first
frame of the next record.
•When the latest recorded image is played, playback may start from a point several seconds
before/after a point that is 10 seconds before the
latest recorded image. The playback or audio output may be paused some ten seconds after the
start of the playback depending on the volume of
recorded image data. If the audio output stops,
pause playback and replay it again.
•When the frame rate is set to 25 ips ~ 60 ips,
recorded images may not be played smoothly.
•If the recorder cannot continue playback due to a
large load, it stops the playback and returns to the
live display.
When copying images
Copying of recorded images may start from a point
several seconds (*) before the designated start time
when copying recorded images.
When downloading recorded images
Downloading of recorded images may start from a
point several seconds (*) earlier than the designated
start time.
* Time (seconds) differs depending on the refresh
interval setting of the camera (0.2 - 5 seconds). In
the recorder, the refresh interval setting of the camera is set to 1 second at the camera registration.
Refer to the operating instructions of the camera for
information about the refresh interval setting.
When using a USB memory stick/
external storage device
After a USB memory stick is inserted, it may take time
to recognize the medium. It also may take time if the
capacity size of the inserted media is large.
5
When using the web browser
•If the camera is set to high frame rate and high
resolution, update of images may take time or
images may be displayed intermittently. If the
camera is used with the following settings, the
above may be improved by using a PC described
in the specifications.
[Setting examples]
1-screen display Image capture size:
FHD (1920×1080), frame rate: 60 ips,
image quality: XF
1-screen display Image capture size:
HD (1280×720), frame rate: 60 ips,
image quality: XF
4-screen display Image capture size:
HD (1280×720), frame rate: 30 ips,
image quality: XF
[Specifications]
CPU: Intel® CoreTM i7 6700 or better
Memory: 8 GB (4 GB×2) or more
6
Before using this product
Motion detection (VMD) function
The motion detection (VMD) function of cameras detects motions referring to changes of luminance (brightness)
in areas set in advance.
The motion detection function will not effectively work in the following situations or may sometimes be malfunctioning.
•When there is a very little difference in luminance (brightness) between a background and a subject
•When brightness of images is low such as at night
•When a subject moves very slow
•When a subject is very small
•When the amount of rays of light incidence changes frequently such as at a window or outdoors.
•When light such as sunlight or car headlight comes from outside
•When a fluorescent lamp flickers
•When a subject has depth
When configuring the motion detection settings, check the function performance both in daytime and at night
after appropriately configuring the area settings and the sensitivity settings according to the camera installation
conditions and possible movement of subjects. When the detection function does not work or false detection
occurs, use a sensor separately. Refer to the operating instructions of the camera for further information.
Time display of recorded images
When displaying recorded images, the displayed date & time may sometimes skips. This is not a malfunction.
The displayed date & time on the monitor and the recorder may sometimes not be exactly the same. This is
also not malfunction.
Response to the mouse operations
While this recorder is processing multiple operations at the same time, the response to the operations from the
connected mouse may temporarily become slow. This is not a malfunction.
7
Black screen displayed when playing recorded images
In the following cases, a black screen may be displayed during playing recorded images. However, this is not a
malfunction.
•When changing cameras or screen patterns during playback or pausing
•When skipping/reverse skipping during playback
•When fast forwarding/reverse fast forwarding during playback
•When the latest recorded image is played while displaying images on a multiscreen*
•When changing the selected camera during the multi-screen display
•When going to the next recording event list by fast forwarding/reverse fast forwarding or skipping/reverse
skipping during playback
•When playback operation is affected by another operation (such as when receiving multiple alarms sequentially or while copying is being performed simultaneously)
* Some camera images go black depending on the data volume.
Recording operation
The recorder can connect up to 32* cameras and record their images on the HDD.
The following recording operations are available.
Schedule recording:
Recording that is automatically performed at the designated time range on the designated day(s) of the week
Event recording:
Recording that is automatically performed when an event occurs (such as terminal
alarm/camera site alarm/command alarm, etc.)
Emergency recording: Gives priority to recording video and audio at emergency using the external switch
connected to the emergency record input terminal of the recorder.
* When registering the license for 32 cameras by the additional camera kit.
Important:
•Recording may not be performed for around 3 seconds in the following cases. However, this is not a malfunction.
• When the settings are changed and the setup menu is closed during recording
Event type
The following event recording types are displayed in list form on the web browser:
SCH: Schedule recording
EMR: Emergency recording
SD: SD backup rec.
The following are detailed event recording types.
COM: Displayed when a command alarm occurred
TRM: Displayed when a terminal alarm occurred
CAM: Displayed when a camera site alarm occurred
PRE: Pre-event recording
Extra function
To increase number of connected cameras, it is necessary to register the Additional Camera Kit (option) license.
To use the secure function, it is necessary to register the Secure Communication Kit (option) license.
To use the business intelligence function, it is necessary to register the additional business intelligence kit
(option) license.
To configure Mirroring (RAID1) or RAID5/RAID6, it is necessary to register the additional RAID Kit (option) license.
8
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the basic settings [Basic setup]
The basic settings of the recorder such as date & time and recording mode, etc. can be configured on the
"Basic setup" page.
The "Basic setup" page provides access to the [Date/Language], [Camera] and [REC & event] pages.
Note:
•Refer to "Configure the minimum settings [Easy Start]" of the Installation Guide for the [Quick setup] - [Easy
Start] of the setup menu.
Display the basic setup pages
Click the desired button on the setup menu.
Note:
•The setup menu can be displayed by clicking the [Setup] button on the operation panel of the operation screen.
[Date/Language] button: Displays the "Date/Language" page. Perform settings such as date & time and
daylight saving time.
[Camera] button:
Displays the "Camera" page. Perform registration and setup of network cameras.
[REC & event] button: Displays the "REC & event" page. Configure the recording schedules and event
actions.
Set up date & time and language [Date/Language]
The "Date/Language" page has the [Date & time adjustment], [Date & time settings] and [Language] tabs.
9
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Date & time adjustment] tab
Set the current date & time.
■ Date & time
[Date]
Set the current date. Select the year, month and day
from the calendar.
[<<Y]/[Y>>] button: Selects the previous or next
year.
[<M]/[M>] button: Selects the previous or next
month.
[Time]
Set the current time.
Important:
•Click the [Apply] button after setting the date &
time. →The second will be set to "00".
[Date & time settings] tab
Perform settings such as date & time format, time zone, daylight saving time, and time adjustment method.
[Time]
Select a time display format. (Example: 3 o’clock in
the afternoon)
24 h: 15:00:00
12 h: 03:00:00 PM
Default: 12 h (WJ-NX300K)
24 h (WJ-NX300K/G)
■ Time zone
Select the time zone and shift to/from daylight saving
time.
■ Display format
Select a display format for the current date & time.
[Set time zone]
Select your time zone.
GMT-12:00 - GMT+13:00
Default: GMT-5:00 (WJ-NX300K)
GMT (WJ-NX300K/G)
Note:
•"Date & time display" on the [Camera setup] tab
(☞ Page 17) corresponds to the display format
settings on this tab.
[Daylight saving time]
Determine how to switch to/from daylight saving time.
The asterisk "*" will be displayed before date & time
during daylight saving time.
Out: Does not apply daylight saving time.
Auto: Automatically applies daylight saving time
based on the pre-set Start/End date and time
of daylight saving time.
Default: Auto
[Date]
Select a date/time display format. (Example: March 1,
2014)
yyyy/mm/dd: 2014/03/01
Mmm/dd/yyyy: Mar/01/2014
dd/Mmm/yyyy: 01/Mar/2014
mm/dd/yyyy: 03/01/2014
dd/mm/yyyy: 01/03/2014
Default: Mmm/dd/yyyy (WJ-NX300K)
dd/mm/yyyy (WJ-NX300K/G)
10
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Start/End date and time]
Set up the rule of the Start/End date and time of daylight saving time.
It is displayed when "Auto" is selected in "Daylight
saving time".
Select "Designate by day of the week" or "Designate
by date" as a method to assign the starting (In) and
ending (Out) date and time of daylight saving time.
Master: Outputs a signal from ALARM/CONTROL
connector on the rear panel of the recorder
and adjusts time of other equipment. When
you select "Master", the setting of "Operation
time and date" to set the time for time adjustment will be displayed.
Default: Off
[Operation time and date]
Set time to output a signal from ALARM/CONTROL
connector. It is displayed when you select "Master"
of the "Auto time adjustment".
Default: 00:00
Important:
•Setting is impossible when the interval between
start (In)/end (Out) is less than an hour.
[Auto time adjustment]
Select a method of auto clock adjustment from the
following.
Off: Does not adjust the time automatically.
Slave: Receives a signal from the ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel of the
recorder and adjusts the clock. When the signal is received and if the clock is within 29
minutes ± the hour, the time will be adjusted to
00 minutes 00 seconds.
[Language] tab
Select the display language for the main monitor and for the web browser on the PC.
[Language]
Japanese/ English/ Français/ Español/ Deutsch/
Italiano/ Русский/ Português/ ไทย/ 中文
Default: English
11
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Camera setup [Camera]
The "Camera" page has the [Camera registration] tab, the [Camera setup] tab and the [Advanced setup] tab.
[Camera registration] tab
Perform settings such as the network settings of the camera (IP address and port number), and the display
position on the main monitor.
When performing the initial settings, displays camera information detected/set on the "Easy Start".
[Change the display position of camera]
The camera numbers can be interchanged. When the
[Setup >] button is clicked, the "Change the display
position of camera" window opens to edit the settings. (☞ Page 16)
[Detect cameras]
The cameras connected to a network can be
detected for registration. (☞ Page 13)
[Management of camera user]
Set a user name/password of the camera in the camera.
(☞ Page 14)
[Registered information]
Change the "Model", "Option", "Address" and "Compression".
When the [Setup >] button is clicked, the "Registered
information" window opens to edit the settings.
(☞ Page 15)
In the event of communication trouble with the camera, one of the following error messages is displayed
for "Error information".
Connection error: The communication with the
camera disconnected.
Authentication error: The user authentication of
the camera failed.
Camera error: The response from the camera is
incorrect.
Note:
•When an error message is displayed, check the
camera connections and settings (☞ operating
instructions of the camera). If the problem cannot
be solved, refer to "Easy Start" of Installation
Guide and register the camera again.
12
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Detect cameras for registration [Detect cameras]
Clicking the [Setup >] button of "Detect cameras" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the following window.
After editing the settings, click the [OK] button to save the settings and return to the [Camera registration] tab.
[Results]
New: Displayed when the camera is newly connected
to the recorder.
Replaced: Displayed when the camera has been
replaced by another one.
Added: Displayed when the camera connection is
added to the recorder.
Registered: Displayed when the camera has already
been registered.
Lost: Displayed when the registered camera is not
detected.
Blank: No camera is detected.
Note:
•Before the settings, register the cameras into the
network. Even though it is possible to detect up to
192 cameras, the number of cameras that can be
registered is the same number as registered
licenses.
[IP address]
Displays the IP addresses configured for the detected
cameras.
[Auto addressing]
The IP addresses of the cameras whose checkboxes
are marked will be automatically configured.
[Port selection]
Select the port to which the camera to be detected is
connected.
[Start IP address]
Specify the start IP address and order when setting
the IP address automatically.
[New] button
Deletes all the current settings and searches all the
connected cameras. The models, results of the
detected cameras and IP addresses will be displayed.
Note:
•It is impossible to register cameras in other networks
via the same router.
•For the security enhancement, changing of the IP
address of the camera will become impossible
when 20 minutes have passed after the power is
turned on. Refer to the operating instructions of
the camera for further information.
•When "On" is selected for the "DHCP" setting of
the detected cameras, the recorder will forcibly
change the setting to "Off" to give the IP
addresses automatically.
•If the IP address of the camera is set to be
assigned automatically, an IP address will be
assigned to the camera when the [OK] button is
clicked. In this case, the default gateway
(☞ Page 50) of the recorder is set to the default
gateway of the camera.
•Click the [Cancel] button to return to the [Camera
registration] tab without applying the camera
detection result.
[Addition] button
Detects only the added or replaced cameras. The
models, results of the detected cameras and IP
addresses will be displayed.
[No.]
Shows a number of detected cameras in order of the
IP address. The maximum number of detectable
cameras will be 192 units.
[Select]
Mark the checkboxes of cameras to register.
The vacant number will be fulfilled by the subsequent
camera.
[Model]
When Panasonic cameras are used, the model numbers will be displayed.
13
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Change the password of camera [Management of camera user]
Click the [Setup >] button of "Management of camera user" on the [Camera registration] tab to display the
following screen.
Note:
•For user name and password, enter those of camera
administrator rights according to the specifications
of the camera. (Please refer to the operating instructions of the camera.)
•The entered user name and password are set as
registered information of the applicable camera
when the settings to the camera is completed.
•Click [Exit] button when you set the user name
and password.
[Settings]
Select items to set up.
Register camera administrator: Registers a user name
and password to a camera whose administrator is not
registered. Enter a user name/password.
Note:
•Cameras that already have the User name/
Password registered cannot register another User
name/Password.
Change password: Changes the password of the
camera user registered to the recorder only. Enter a
password.
■ Camera selection
Select the camera to which the settings are sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the set
user name and password are sent.
(When "Register camera administrator" is selected in
the "Settings", you cannot select cameras whose
administrators have already been registered.)
[Transmission] button
Transmit the settings to the camera. Once transmission is completed and the setting has been applied to
the camera, "OK" will be displayed in the "Results"
field. If the display reads "Authentication error", etc.,
the camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Camera registration] tab.
14
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Change the registered information [Registered information]
Click the [Setup >] button for "Registered information" on the [Camera registration] tab to display the following
items.
After editing the settings, click the [OK] button to save the settings and return to the [Camera registration] tab.
Note:
•Assignment example by the application of camera
stream
①Recording by compression of H.264, 1-screen
live display, browser display: H. 264(1)
②Sub-stream recording by compression of
H.264, live multi-screen display: H.264(2)
③Recording by compression of H.264 or H.265,
1-screen live display, browser display:
H.264(1), H.264(3), H.264(4), H.265(1), H.265(3),
H.265(4)
④Sub-stream recording by compression of H.264
or H.265, live multi-screen display:
H.264(2), H.265(2)
•When selecting "MJPEG" for "Compression", the
live image transmission rate and the frame rate
will be changed automatically to "5 ips".
(☞ Page 35)
•When selecting "MJPEG" for "Compression",
images whose aspect ratio is 16:9 cannot be
selected. (☞ Page 38)
•When selecting "H.264(n)" or "H.265(n)" for
"Compression", it will become possible to select
"XF" in the image quality setting.
•Depending on the model of the camera, the camera may reboot when the compression method is
changed. The reboot will be detected as a communication error, but that is not a malfunction.
[Camera]
Up to 32 cameras can be connected. By registering
the licenses, number of the cameras can be increased
to 24 or 32.
[Model]
The model of a registered camera will be displayed.
(Blank: Camera is not registered)
Click the [▼] button to select the camera model from
the camera categories. Refer to the "readme.txt" on
the provided CD-ROM for camera categories.
It is unnecessary to change it for normal use.
[Option]
Assign the operational mode of the camera having a
specific function due to the difference in function of
the camera.
[User name]
Enter the user name for accessing the cameras and
logging in using the on-screen keyboard (☞ Installation
Guide Page 8). Register the user name whose
access level is "Administrator".
[Address]
An address already in use will be displayed. The
address can be changed using the on-screen keyboard. Enter up to 255 alphanumeric characters
including hyphens (-) and periods (.).
[Password]
Enter the password to be used for the user whose name
has been registered as "User name" (☞ Installation
Guide Page 8). (Up to 32 alphanumeric characters)
Note:
•Entering "http://" is not necessary if the host name
is entered.
[Compression]
Select the image compression method.
H.265(1)/ H.265(3)/ H.265(4)/ H.264(1)/ H.264(3)/
H.264(4)/ MJPEG
[Port No.]
Set a port number from 1 - 65535 for use by the camera.
Default: 80
Note:
•Enter the port number in five digits, right aligned.
(Example: When the port number is 80, enter
"00080".) The leading zeros are omitted here.
15
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Auto model number acquisition]
Click the [Execute] button to acquire the model number from the camera registered for this product and
update the model number information.
When the acquired model number is different from
the registered one, as the image capture size is
changed to the default, reset the image capture size
in [REC & event]-[Recording setup] again.
[Table to delete]
To delete registration information or remove a previously connected camera, either select the camera
number and click the [Delete] button, or delete the IP
address of the respective camera.
Interchange camera numbers [Change the display position of camera]
Click the [Setup >] button for "Change the display position of camera" on the [Camera registration] tab to display the following items.
The registered camera is displayed on the screen from the left top to right in order of 1, 2, ∙∙∙16. If the configuration is set to 32 cameras, they are displayed on two 16-screen.
To interchange camera numbers, drag the camera image to be moved with the mouse and drop on the desired
position.
If the camera titles are to be interchanged as well, mark the "Also change camera titles" checkbox.
[Refresh] button
Obtain the latest camera image after interchanging
cameras.
[Back] button
Save the settings and return to the [Camera registration] tab.
16
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Camera setup] tab
Transmit the date & time and text displayed on an image, the refresh rate, the VMD alarm and the Light control
mode etc. settings to the camera. Click the [Setup >] button for each item to open the respective setup window.
Note:
•The settings of some models of Panasonic cameras only can be configured. Refer to the "readme.txt" on
the provided CD-ROM about the supported cameras. Some functions are not supported depending on the
models of the connected cameras. For further information about detailed specifications, refer to the operating instructions of the cameras in use.
•It is impossible to check the current settings using this recorder.
17
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up date & time display [Date & time display]
Select the date & time display position for each camera and transmit it to the cameras to change the camera
settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Date & time display" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the following
items.
■ Camera selection
Select the camera to which the date & time display
setting is to be sent. Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the date & time setting to the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field. If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the camera connection or the setting
may have failed.
■ Setting items
[Display]
Choose whether or not to display the date & time. If
date & time display is activated, date & time will be
displayed on camera images and will also be
recorded with the recorded images.
To transmit the settings to the camera, mark this
item, and select either of the following.
On: Date & time displayed
Off: Date & time not displayed
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
Note:
•The display format corresponds to the settings on
the [Date & time settings] tab (☞ Page 10).
[Position]
Select the position to display the date & time on the
images.
If the setting is to be transmitted to the camera, mark
this item to select the display position.
L-Upper/ L-Lower/ R-Upper/ R-Lower
Note:
•The position to display the title edited on "Display
Title" (☞ Page 19) is the same as the "Position"
selected here to display the date & time edited on
"Date & time display".
18
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up OSD [Display Title]
Determine whether to display the title and select the title to display for each camera, the settings will be
changed after the settings have been transmitted to the camera.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Display Title" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the following items.
•[Display Title]
Enter a character string to be displayed on the
image using the on-screen keyboard. (☞ Installation Guide Page 8) (Up to 16 alphanumeric characters)
Available characters: 0-9, A-Z, ! # $ % ( )* + , - . / :
;=?
■ Setting items
[Display]
Select whether or not to display the title on camera
images. If title display is activated, the title will be displayed on camera images and will also be recorded
with the recorded images.
To transmit the settings to the camera, mark this
item, and select either of the following.
On: Title displayed
Off: Title not displayed
•[Camera title]
Display the camera title registered on the [Main
monitor] tab of the monitor page (☞ Page 46).
•[Copy] button
The camera title registered on the [Main monitor]
tab of the monitor page can be used as display
title. Clicking this button will copy the camera title
to the "Display Title" field.
•[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
This will close the window.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Display
title" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Display Title]
To transmit the settings to the camera, mark this
item, and edit the title displayed on the image. Clicking the [Edit >] button will display the following title
editing window:
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Display title" to the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
19
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up how to turn on or off the indicators [Indicator]
Select how to turn on or off the link indicator, access indicator or status indicators for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to change the camera settings. Refer to the operating instructions of the
camera for further information.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Indicator" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup page.
[Indicator]
On: All the indicators will light in accordance with
the status.
On (Access): Only the live indicator will light when
images are viewed.
Off: All the indicators will light off.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the "Indicator" setting is
to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Indicator" to the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
20
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set the camera image transmission priority [Transmission priority]
Select the transmission priority setting for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to change
the camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Transmission priority" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup page.
[Control time period]
Select the period of controlling H.264 bit rate to be
recorded from the following when the transmission
priority is "Advanced VBR".
1 h, 6 h, 24 h, 1 week
[Priority setting]
Set which to prioritize, the "Frame rate" or the "Image
quality", when the transmission priority is the "Frame
rate".
Frame rate priority: Prioritizes the frame rate. The
image quality may vary according to the
object.
Image quality priority: Reduces the change in the
image quality. The frame rate may be slower
depending on the object.
■ Setting items
[Transmission priority]
Select the transmission mode for H.264/H.265 images
from the following.
The "Transmission priority" will be configured based
on the markings of the checkboxes of "Stream1" and
"Stream2".
Frame rate: H.264/H.265 images will be transmitted
with the frame rate specified in "Frame rate".
Advanced VBR: H.264 images will be transmitted
with the frame rate specified in "Frame rate".
When this parameter is selected, this product
transmits images while adjusting the average
of transmission amount in the period specified
in "Control time period" to match it to the
specified bit rate.
VBR: Transmits H.264/H.265 images with the
frame rate specified in "Frame rate" and the
image quality level specified in "Image quality"
kept. The image quality is fixed and the storage capacity varies according to the "Image
quality" setting and conditions of the object.
[Smart coding (GOP control)]
Set whether to use the GOP control or not when the
transmission priority is set to the "VBR".
Off: Does not use the GOP control.
On (Advanced): Can reduce the data amount
when the motion in the image is less.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Transmission priority" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Transmission priority" to
the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
Note:
•Set up the transmission mode again when the
camera is changed on the camera registration
screen or change of the camera is detected.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
[Burst tolerance level]
Select the allowance of "Max bit rate (per client)" for
the H.264 bit rate from the following when the transmission priority is "Advanced VBR".
High, Middle, Low
21
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up the refresh interval [Refresh interval]
Select the image refresh interval for each camera and transmit it to the cameras to change the camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Refresh interval" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup page.
[Refresh interval]
Select an interval to update the image display. If used
in a network environment where frequent errors
occur, shorten the refresh interval to reduce image
distortions. However, the refresh interval may be
longer than the set value.
0.2 s/ 0.5 s/ 1 s/ 2 s/ 3 s
Note:
•Set up the refresh interval again when the camera
is changed on the camera registration screen or
change of the camera is detected.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Refresh
interval" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Refresh interval" to the
camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
Important:
•Image transmission from the camera will temporarily be canceled and no image will be recorded
during this period if the setting to change the
refresh interval is transmitted to the camera.
22
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up the method of camera installation [Upside-down]
Select the method of installation for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to change the
camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Upside-down" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup window.
[Upside-down]
On (desktop): Select this when the camera is to
be installed with the dome side up.
Off (ceiling): Select this when the camera is to be
installed with the dome side down.
Wall: Select this when the camera is to be
installed on a wall.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the
"Upside-down" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Upside-down" to the
camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
Note:
•If a fisheye camera is registered, "Off (ceiling)" will
be set. Select "Wall" to install the camera on the
wall.
23
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set the image rotation of camera [Image rotation]
Select the image rotation for each camera and transmit it to the camera to change the camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Image rotation" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup window.
[Image rotation]
• 0 °(Off): Does not rotate the image.
• 90 °: Rotates the image by 90 °.
• 180 °(Upside-down): Inverses the image upside-down.
• 270 °: Rotates the image by 270 °.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Image
rotation" is to be sent. Mark the checkbox of the
camera to which the setup information is to be
transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Image rotation" to the
camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
24
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up pan/tilt-flip [Pan/tilt-flip]
Select the pan/tilt-flip function for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to change the camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Pan/tilt-flip" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup page.
[Pan/tilt-flip]
Select whether or not to activate the pan/tilt-flip function that can achieve camera controllability equal to
360° endless cameras.
On: The pan/tilt-flip function will work.
Off: The pan/tilt-flip function will not work.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Pan/
tilt-flip" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Pan/tilt-flip" to the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
25
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up Super Dynamic [Super Dynamic (Wide dynamic range)]
Select the Super Dynamic function for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to change the
camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Super Dynamic (Wide dynamic range)" on the [Camera setup] tab will display
the setup page.
[Super Dynamic (Wide dynamic range)]
Select "On" or "Off" to determine whether or not to
activate the super dynamic function.
On (High): The super dynamic function will work.
When "On (High)" is selected, the tone level
will be compensated to emphasize the contrast.
On:The super dynamic function will work. When
"On" is selected, the tone level will be compensated to emphasize the sensitivity.
Off:The super dynamic function will not work.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Super
Dynamic" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Super Dynamic" to the
camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
26
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set the adaptive black stretch function of the camera [Adaptive black stretch]
Determine whether to enable the adaptive black stretch function for each camera. The settings will be changed
after the settings have been transmitted to the camera.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Adaptive black stretch" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup window.
[Adaptive black stretch]
By using the adaptive black stretch function, dark
area in the image will turn brighter by the digital
image processing.
On: The adaptive black stretch function will be
enabled.
Off: The adaptive black stretch function will be
disabled.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Adaptive black stretch" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Adaptive black stretch" to
the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
Important:
•When "On" is selected for "Adaptive black
stretch", noise in dark area in image may increase
and the periphery of the border between the dark
area and the bright area will be displayed brighter/
darker than the other brighter/darker area in the
image.
27
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set the back light compensation function of the camera [Back light compensation
(BLC)]
Determine whether to enable the back light compensation function for each camera. The settings will be
changed after the settings have been transmitted to the camera.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Back light compensation (BLC)" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the
setup window.
[Back light compensation (BLC)]
When "On" is selected for "Super Dynamic", this
function is not available.
The back light compensation function masks the
brighter area in image and compensates exposure in
silhouette created by back light.
On: Mask area will automatically be set.
Off: Mask area will not be set automatically. It is
necessary to set mask areas manually.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Back
light compensation (BLC)" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Back light compensation
(BLC)" to the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
28
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up Light control mode [Light control mode]
Select how to control the amount of light for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to
change the camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Light control mode" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup page.
[Light control mode]
Outdoor scene: Depending on the brightness
level (illuminance), the iris will automatically be
controlled together with the shutter speed
adjustment to control light.
Indoor scene (50Hz): The shutter speed will automatically be adjusted to prevent flicker caused
by fluorescent light. (For the 50 Hz areas)
Indoor scene (60Hz): Same as "Indoor scene"
above. (For 60 Hz areas)
ELC: The iris will automatically be controlled with
the shutter speed adjustment to control light.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Light
control mode" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Light control mode" to
the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
Note:
•When "Outdoor scene" is selected, flicker may
occur when a subject is under fluorescent lighting.
29
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set the automatic slow shutter of the camera [Auto slow shutter (Maximum
shutter)]
Select the auto slow shutter setting for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to change the
camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Auto slow shutter (Maximum shutter)" on the [Camera setup] tab will display
the setup page.
Note:
•When "Max. 16/30s" is selected, the electronic
sensitivity will automatically be enhanced up to 16
times.
•When "Off" is selected for "AGC", this function is
not available. Refer to the operating instructions
of the camera for further information.
[Auto slow shutter (Maximum shutter)]
The auto slow shutter adjusts the sensor storage time
to enhance the electronic sensitivity.
The following are available setting values.
Off (1/30s)/ Max. 2/30s/ Max. 4/30s/ Max. 6/30s/
Max. 10/30s/ Max. 16/30s
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Auto
slow shutter" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Auto slow shutter" to the
camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
Important:
•When the auto slow shutter is set, the frame rate
may drop. Noise or white dots (scratches) may
also be seen in image.
30
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set the black and white switchover of the camera [Day & Night (IR/electrical)]
Select the day and night setting for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to change the
camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Day & Night (IR/electrical)" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup
window.
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "Day &
Night (IR/electrical)" is to be sent.
Mark the checkbox of the camera to which the setup
information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Day & Night (IR/electrical)"
to the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Day & Night (IR/electrical)]
Select a method of how to switch between B/W
image and color image from the following.
Off: Color images will always be taken.
On: B/W images will always be taken.
On (IR Light On): B/W images will always be
taken. Use it at night time or using near-IR
lighting.
Auto1 (Normal)/Auto: Depending on the image
brightness (illuminance), the system automatically switches from/ to the color image to/from
B/W image.
It switches to the color mode when the light
source is bright and to the monochrome mode
when the light source is not bright.
Auto2 (IR Light): Use it at night time or when using
near-IR light source.
Auto3 (Super Chroma Compensation (SCC)): Use
it if you want to keep the color image even if
the light source is not bright. Super Chroma
Compensation (SCC) function keeps the color
image under the lower illuminance than "Auto1
(Normal)".
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
Note:
•"On", "Auto2" and "Auto3" can be selected for
cameras having "Day & Night (electrical)" only, but
they are not operable.
31
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set the intelligent auto of camera [Intelligent auto]
Select the intelligent auto for each camera and transmit it to the camera to change the camera settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "Intelligent auto" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup window.
[Intelligent auto]
Set whether or not to turn on the intelligent auto function. The intelligent auto is a function to judge the
scene (back light, outside, night view), people's faces,
objects in motion, stop the lens down automatically
and adjust the shutter speed and contrast to improve
visibility of people's faces and objects in motion.
Off: Does not use the intelligent auto function
On: Uses the intelligent auto function
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the
"Intelligent auto" is to be sent. Mark the checkbox of
the camera to which the setup information is to be
transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "Intelligent auto" to the
camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field.
If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
camera connection or the setting may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
32
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up VMD alarm [VMD alarm]
Select the VMD function for each camera and transmit the information to the cameras to change the camera
settings.
Clicking the [Setup >] button for "VMD alarm" on the [Camera setup] tab will display the setup page.
[VMD alarm]
Select whether or not to use the VMD (VMD: Video
Motion Detection) alarm function when a change
(movement) is detected in the image. Refer to the
operating instructions of the camera in use for how to
configure the VMD alarm.
On: Detects alarms.
Off: Does not detect alarms.
[Detection sensitivity]
To transmit the settings to the camera, mark this item,
and select either of the following.
1(Low) - 15(High)
■ Camera Selection
Select the camera to which the setting of the "VMD
alarm" is to be sent. Mark the checkbox of the camera
to which the setup information is to be transmitted.
[Transmission] button
Transmit the setting of the "VMD alarm" to the camera.
Once transmission is completed and the setting has
been applied to the camera, "OK" will be displayed in
the "Results" field. If the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the camera connection or the setting
may have failed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings.
The screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
33
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Advanced setup] tab
Set the connection method of the camera.
Clicking the [Setup >] button of "Connection method" under the [Advanced setup] tab displays the setup screen.
■ Connection method
[Connection method]
Set the connection method for each camera.
RTP: Connects with the RTP.
RTSP: Connects with the RTSP. It is used for
local camera connection and others.
Internet mode: Connects in the Internet mode. It
is used to connect remote cameras or for
other connection.
Note:
•The connection method will become valid for the
Panasonic camera whose compression type is
H.264/H.265.
34
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up recording/events [REC & event]
The "REC & event" page has 3 tabs; the [Recording setup] tab, the [Event setup] tab and the [Advanced setup] tab.
Recording setup tab [Recording setup]
Configure the settings relating to schedule recording. Set the day(s), time table(s), frame rate and image quality
for recording.
[Schedule recording]
Mark the checkbox (es) if you want to carry out the
schedule recording based on the set time bar.
[Event recording]
Mark the checkbox (es) if you want to carry out event
recording based on the set time bar. The recorder
does not record the image even if the alarm occurs
during time in which the event recording is not set.
[e-Mail]
To send an alarm e-mail when an event occurs, mark
this item. The event recording must be checked to set
this item.
Refer to "Configure the settings relating to the mail
notification [e-Mail]" (☞ Page 54) for the setting of
the destination.
■ Schedules
Recording will be performed according to the schedules set in advance. Select the day(s) of the week and
the time table(s).
[Days to record]
Select the day(s) of the week to record. Mark the
checkbox(es) of the day(s) of the week to record.
[Panasonic alarm protocol]
Mark the checkbox of this item to automatically transmit information on an event that occurs to a PC using
the Panasonic alarm protocol. The event recording
must be checked to set this item.
Refer to "Configure the Panasonic alarm protocol
settings [Panasonic alarm protocol]" (☞ Page 55)
for the setting of the address.
[Schedule to record]
6 time tables can be set up for "[Time table1]". The
time bar indicates 24 hours in steps of 15 minutes.
Click the desired position on the time bar to designate the start and end time. When the time is designated, the time bar turns red.
[Advanced >] button
The "Advanced schedule setup" page will be displayed. In addition to 6 schedule recordings, 6 event
recordings can be set up. The schedule settings can
be set up to 16 patterns. (☞ Page 36)
Note:
•At the default, schedule recording and event
recording have been set for 24 hours on Time
table1. To delete the designated start and end
time, right-click the timetable.
•The recording time table can be set by dragging the
start and end time on the time bar with the mouse.
•Be sure to set so that there is no overlap between
the 6 time tables. When attempting to set the
same time as already set on another time bar, the
time immediately before or after the overlapping
time will be set.
•Within the same time table, event recording has
priority over schedule recording.
■ Recording setup (All cameras)
Set the recording frame rate and image quality. The
settings will be applied to all cameras.
[Frame rate]
Select the recording frame rate.
1 ips/ 3 ips/ 5 ips/ 10 ips/ 15 ips/ 30 ips
Default: 10 ips
35
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Important:
• For a camera whose compression method is [MJPEG],
"10 ips / 15 ips / 30 ips" cannot be selected.
•If a camera whose compression method is
[MJPEG] is included, [MJPEG] camera is set to
"5 ips" even if "10 ips / 15 ips / 30 ips" is set by
slider bar of frame rate setting. You can confirm
the current setting value with [Advanced setup >]
in Recording setup (All cameras).
Note:
•The referenced recording days will be displayed correctly only when the settings have been saved while
the recorder has recognized the camera correctly.
•The referenced recording days will be calculated
based on the assumption that recording is started
on Monday. The special day settings are not taken
into account.
•This value excludes the HDD consumption for the
event/emergency recording.
•If a camera manufactured by other than
Panasonic is used, the value of "Referenced
recording days" will not be displayed.
•"*" preceding an item indicates that the item has
been changed on the "Advanced recording setup"
page.
•When configured to perform recording in high resolution and high quality, recording may sometimes
not be performed at the specified rate. When
there may be possibility to fail recording at the
specified rate while using only Panasonic cameras, the confirmation window will be displayed.
[Image quality]
Select the recording image quality.
NQ (Normal): Standard quality
FQ (Fine): High quality
SF (Super Fine): Super fine quality
XF (Extra Fine): Extra fine quality
Default: FQ
Important:
•For a camera whose compression method is
[MJPEG], "XF" cannot be set.
•If a camera whose compression method is [MJPEG]
is included, [MJPEG] camera is set to "SF" even if
"XF" is set by slider bar of image quality setting. You
can confirm the current setting value with [Advanced
setup >] in Recording setup (All cameras).
[Advanced >] button
The "Advanced recording setup" will be displayed.
Each camera can be set up separately for recording.
(☞ Page 37)
[Referenced recording days]
Calculates and displays the total number of days for
which recording on the hard disk drives is available.
Configure the advanced settings for schedule recording
[Advanced schedule setup]
Up to 16 schedule patterns can be set. Up to 6 time zones of the schedule recording or event recording can be
set for each schedule.
Clicking the [Advanced >] button in the "Schedules" field will open the "Advanced schedule setup" page.
Time table1: Recording according to Time table1.
Time table2: Recording according to Time table2.
Off: Neither schedule nor event recording will take
place.
■ Event recording
Set the recording duration in the event that an alarm
occurs and the recording duration before an alarm
occurs.
[Event recording duration]
Set the recording duration in the event that an alarm
occurs.
2 s/ 5 s/ 10 s/ 20 s/ 30 s/ 1 min/ 2 min/ 3 min/
5 min/ 10 min/ 15 min
■ Days to record
Select the actions to be taken on each day of the
week based on a time table. [●] indicates the
selected state, [○] the unselected state.
36
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Event recording] (☞ Page 35)
Manual: Recording will continue while receiving
an alarm input signal. Recording will be performed for at least 8 seconds.
Ext.: Alarm output will continue until the alarm
action is reset. Refer to the "Cancel the alarm
action" (☞ Page 126) for further information
about how to cancel the alarm action.
Default: 30 s
[e-Mail] (☞ Page 35)
[Panasonic alarm protocol] (☞ Page 35)
[Prev page] / [Next page]
The schedule settings to be configured will be
switched over.
[Pre-event duration]
Set the recording duration before an alarm occurs.
0 s/ 5 s/ 10 s/ 15 s
Default: 0 s
[Display the schedule list.]
Display each time table from Schedule 1 to Schedule
16 and settings of the schedule recording, event
recording, etc. The schedule list will be displayed
when clicking [View] button.
Note:
•The actual recording time may sometimes be
longer than the duration selected for this setting.
•A 15 second pre-event recording is available when
the bit rate setting of the camera is 4 Mbps. Time of
the pre-event recording may be shorter than the set
time if the image is recorded in high resolution over
4 Mbps, high image quality and high rate.
•Pre-event recording is not performed when "0 s"
is selected.
•When images are set to be recorded together with
audio, the audio may not be recorded at the
beginning of the pre-event recording.
Time zones from 1 to 6 of each time table are superimposed and displayed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Recording setup] tab.
■ Schedule to record
Two time tables can be set.
[Schedule recording] (☞ Page 35)
Set up recording for individual cameras [Advanced recording setup]
Set up items such as the image capture size, frame rate and image quality for individual cameras.
Clicking the [Advanced >] button on the [Recording setup (All cameras)] tab will open the advanced setup page.
[Model]
The model number of the connected camera will be
displayed.
(Blank: Camera is not registered)
[Compression]
The compression method selected when registering
camera will be displayed.
37
[Image capture size]
Select a resolution for images to be recorded.
<When the aspect ratio is 4:3>
VGA(640×480)/ SVGA(800×600)/
SXVGA(1280×960)/ UXGA(1600×1200)/
QXGA(2048×1536)/ 5M(2560×1920)/
12M(4000×3000)
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Schedule]
Select a schedule in which the desired recording to
be performed is included.
Schedule1 : Recording will be performed according to the settings for schedule1.
Schedule16: Recording will be performed according to the settings for schedule16.
Default: Schedule1
∙∙∙
<When the aspect ratio is 16:9>
HVGAW(640×360)/ HD(1280×720)/
FHD(1920×1080)/ WQHD(2560×1440)/
4KUHD(3840×2160)
<When the aspect ratio is 1:1>
1.6M(1280×1280)/ 4M(2048×2048)/
5M(2192×2192)/ 8M(2816×2816)/ 9M(2992×2992)
<When the aspect ratio is 9:16>
0.2M(360×640)/ 1M(720×1280)/ 2M(1080×1920)
When the aspect ratio is set to 9:16, the image is
rotated by 90 °. If you want to rotate the image by
270 °, select 270 ° at "Set the image rotation of
camera [Image rotation]". (☞ Page 24)
[Event]
Select the frame rate of the event recording.
1 ips/ 3 ips/ 5 ips/ 10 ips/ 15 ips/ 25 ips/ 30 ips/
(Same as the basic)
Default: Same as the basic
Important:
•The available image capture sizes may differ
depending on the model of the camera and the
compression method.
[Emergency]
Set the frame rate of the emergency recording.
1 ips/ 3 ips/ 5 ips/ 10 ips/ 15 ips/ 25 ips/ 30 ips/
(Same as the basic)
Default: Same as the basic
Note:
•When configured to perform recording in high resolution and high quality, recording may sometimes
not be performed at the specified rate.
•Depending on the model of the camera, the camera may reboot when the image capture size is
changed. The reboot will be detected as a communication error, but that is not a malfunction.
Note:
•If the rate of the basic settings is 50 ips or 60 ips, the
settings of the event recording and the emergency
recording will be the same as the rate or the basic
setting and displayed as "Same as the basic". In this
case, the settings of the event recording and
emergency recording cannot be changed.
•The rates of recorded images set to 5 ips/ 10 ips/
15 ips become 4.2 ips/ 8.3 ips/ 12.5 ips
respectively if any of the basic setup, the event
recording or the emergency recording of the same
camera is set to 25 ips.
•If the SD backup rec. or the SD recording function
of the camera is used, set the frame rate of the
event recording and the emergency recording to
"Same as the basic".
[Rate] (Frame rate) (☞ Page 35)
Note:
•The 25 ips/ 50 ips/ 60 ips is available depending
on the camera model and settings of compression
and image capture size.
•The images of "60 ips (50 ips)" can be displayed
in one screen if a monitor compatible with
1920×1080 p/ 60 Hz (1920×1080 p/ 50 Hz) is used
as a main monitor. (The images on the main monitor other than 1-screen and on the sub monitor
are displayed in "30 ips (25 ips)".)
[Referenced recording days] (☞ Page 36)
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Recording setup] tab.
[Quality] (Image quality) (☞ Page 36)
[Audio]
Select whether or not to record audio together with
images.
On(AAC-LC): Audio will be recorded. (AAC-LC
format)
On: Audio will be recorded. (G.726 format)
Off: Audio will not be recorded.
Default: Off
38
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure event-related settings [Event setup] tab
Configure event-related settings such as the alarm output duration and buzzer duration.
Note:
•If the time set for "Output duration" or "Buzzer
duration" is longer than that set for "Auto reset
time", the time set for "Auto reset time" will be
applied.
[Message display]
Select whether or not to display a message on a PC
connected to a network when an alarm occurs.
On: Display a message.
Off: Does not display a message.
Default: On
■ Alarm action
Configure alarm-related items such as alarm output
duration and alarm auto reset.
[Main monitor action]
While the main monitor is displaying the operation
window, select whether or not to switch to 1-screen
display in association with alarm occurrence.
On: Switch the monitor display in association with
alarm occurrence.
On(ACK/RESET): Switches the monitor display
linking with the alarm confirmation and resetting.
Off: Does not switch the monitor display.
Default: Off
[Output duration]
Select the output duration for the alarm signal output
from the terminal on the recorder’s rear panel when
an alarm occurs. When "0 s" is selected, alarm signals will not be output.
0 s/ 2 s/ 5 s/ 10 s/ 20 s/ 30 s/ 1 min
Ext.: Alarm output will continue until the alarm
action is reset. Refer to the "Cancel the alarm
action" (☞ Page 126) for further information
about how to cancel the alarm action.
Rec.: Output of the alarm signal will continue during event recording.
Default: 2 s
Note:
•When "On(ACK/RESET)" is selected, the monitor
will not be switched and keeps displaying the
same camera images even when a different alarm
occurred while the main monitor action is enabled.
When the alarm reset signal is input to the
ALARM/CONTROL connector, the monitor
switches and shows the different camera images.
If multiple alarms occur while the main monitor
action is enabled, the camera number will be
memorized in sequence.
•The images from the camera selected for
"Recording camera" of "Advanced setup" are displayed on a 1-screen.
•The main monitor action will not be activated
while recorded images are being played back or
the setup menu is being displayed.
•When the auto reset time have passed, it will
return to the previously displayed screen. (When
the mouse is operated while the main monitor
action is being taken, it will not return to the previously displayed screen.)
[Buzzer duration]
Set the duration of the buzzer sound when an alarm
occurs. When "0 s" is selected, the buzzer will not
sound.
0 s/ 2 s/ 5 s/ 10 s/ 20 s/ 30 s/ 1 min
Ext.: The buzzer will keep on sounding until the
alarm action is reset. Refer to the "Cancel the
alarm action" (☞ Page 126) for further information about how to cancel the alarm action.
Rec.: The buzzer will keep on sounding during
event recording.
Default: 2 s
[Auto reset time]
Set the time for automatically resetting the alarm action.
2 s/ 5 s/ 10 s/ 20 s/ 30 s/ 1 min/ 3 min/ 5 min
Ext.: The alarm action will not automatically reset
until it is canceled. Refer to the "Cancel the
alarm action" (☞ Page 126) for further information about how to cancel the alarm action.
Default: Ext.
39
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Event type]
Displayed when "On" or "On(ACK/RESET)" is
selected for "Main monitor action".
A event type to be linked is selected.
[Display]
Displayed when "On" or "On(ACK/RESET)" is
selected for "Main monitor action".
It selects the display in which the main monitor action
to be displayed.
Ctrl screen: Displays in the Ctrl screen.
Wide view: Displays in the Wide view.
■ Advanced event setup
Configure advanced settings for individual alarm types
(terminal alarm, camera site alarm, and command
alarm). Clicking the [Advanced >] button for each item
will open the respective "Advanced setup".
40
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up terminal alarm [Advanced terminal alarm setup]
Configure the settings relating to the recording triggered by an alarm signal supplied to the ALARM/CONTROL
connector of the recorder from an external alarm device such as a door sensor.
Configure the necessary settings for each alarm input terminal of the ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear
panel of the recorder.
Note:
•When many cameras are registered and "All" is
selected for "Recording camera", the start of
alarm recording may be delayed depending on the
cameras. It is recommended to perform pre-event
recording.
[Preset]
Select the camera preset position (001 to 256) to
which the camera is to be moved when an alarm signal is received. If "---" is selected, the camera will not
be moved to a preset position.
■ Advanced terminal alarm setup
[Mode]
Select the action to be taken when an alarm signal is
supplied.
Recording & alarm action: Performs all event
actions according to the settings.
Recording only: Only recording, filing of event
logs, and moving the camera to a preset position will be performed.
Off: Only filing of event logs will be performed.
Default: Recording & alarm action
[Terminal output]
Choose whether or not to output an alarm signal from
the alarm output terminal of the ALARM/CONTROL
connector on the recorder’s rear panel when an alarm
signal is received.
On: Outputs the alarm signals from the alarm output terminal.
Off: Does not output alarm signals.
Default: On
[Terminal input]
Select the terminal status for supplying an alarm signal to the alarm terminal.
N.O. (Normally Open): Signals will be supplied
when short-circuited.
N.C. (Normally Close): Signals will be supplied
when open-circuited.
Default: N.O.
[Alarm log]
Determine whether or not to save the alarm log.
Save: Logs will be saved.
Not save: Logs will not be saved.
Default: Save
[Setup by terminal]
Set up individual terminals numbered from 1 to 9.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Event setup] tab.
[Recording camera]
Select the camera for recording. When "Off" is
selected, recording will not be performed.
All: Applies all the registered cameras for recording.
Default: Camera number associated with the terminal
number
Note:
•Refer to the "Operate the camera" section
(☞ Page 114) for further information about the
camera preset positions.
41
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up camera site alarm [Advanced camera site alarm setup]
Set up the action to be taken when a Panasonic alarm protocol received from a camera triggers camera site
alarm.
Refer to the "Set up terminal alarm [Advanced terminal alarm setup]" section (☞ Page 41) for further information about the items available for "Advanced camera site alarm setup"; "Mode" and "Alarm log", and also
"Recording camera", "Preset" and "Terminal output" under "Setup by camera".
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Event setup] tab.
Note:
•If the event recording time (☞ Page 36) is
shorter than alarm deactivation time set from the
camera, the event recording may not be done for
alarms which continuously occur.
Set up command alarm [Advanced command alarm setup]
Set up the action to be taken when a command alarm signal received from a PC that is connected via a network protocol triggers command alarm.
Refer to the "Set up terminal alarm [Advanced terminal alarm setup]" section (☞ Page 41) for further information about the items available for "Advanced command alarm setup"; "Mode" and "Alarm log", and also
"Recording camera", "Preset" and "Terminal output" under "Setup by command number".
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Event setup] tab.
42
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the advanced settings for recording and events [Advanced setup]
Configure the special settings related to recording on this tab. Set up the recording mode, alarm disarm duration and Panasonic alarm port number (the port number for incoming site alarm).
[Recording time of emergency recording]
Select a recording duration for the emergency recording.
30 s/ 1 min/ 3 min/ 5 min/ 10 min/ 15 min/ 30 min
Manual: Records only while the connected external switch is being pressed. It records at least
8 seconds.
Ext.: Alarm output will continue until the alarm
action is reset. Refer to the "Cancel the alarm
action" (☞ Page 126) for further information
about how to cancel the alarm action.
Default: 30 s
[Recording mode]
Determine whether or not to stop all recording
actions. Set to "Off", primarily to stop access to the
HDD before turning off the power.
On: Performs recording.
Off: Stops all recording actions.
Default: On
[SD backup rec.]
Set whether to save the image on the SD memory
card or not when the communication is disconnected
during the recording.
Important:
•If "Off" is selected, be sure to return the setting to
"On" when resuming operation.
[Alarm disarm duration]
Set the period to suspend event actions for the case
that the same kind of event (terminal alarm, camera
site alarm, command alarm) occurs repeatedly at the
same camera.
2 s/ 3 s/ 5 s/ 10 s
Default: 2 s
On: Uses the SD memory backup function.
Off: Does not use the SD memory backup function.
Default: Off
SD backup rec.
The SD memory backup is a function to save images
on the SD memory card inserted in the camera when
the recorder fails to communicate with the camera
during the set recording time.
The SD memory backup is only available if the camera supports the SD memory recording and the compression is set to H.264/H.265.
The SD memory recording is done by the registered
compression of the camera.
[Panasonic alarm port number]
Specify the number of the port to be used for receiving site alarm.
Default: 1818
Note:
•Enter the port number in five digits, right aligned.
(Example: When the port number is 80, enter
"00080".) The leading zeros are omitted here.
•The following numbers, the HTTP port number, the
HTTPS port number, the FTP port number and the
port number of the port forwarding are unavailable.
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 79, 80, 105, 110,
123, 161, 162, 443, 546, 547, 995, 10001, 10002,
10003, 10004, 10005, 10006, 10007
43
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Note:
•If the camera is set to "Not use" the SD memory
card or the SD memory card is not inserted
(including insufficient insertion), error messages
are displayed some times in a day and recording
is paused for about 20 seconds.
•If the SD backup rec. function is used, set the
operation mode of the SD memory card to
"Overwrite On" from the camera side.
[Smart coding (GOP control)]
Select when you use the smart coding (GOP control)
function of the camera.
Acquire the image saved on the SD memory card
Acquire the image saved on the SD memory card to
the recorder and record it to the HDD.
Acquisition of images from the SD memory card is
automatically done a quarter past every hour.
(0:15, 1:15, ∙∙∙23:15)
You can check whether the recorder is acquiring the
SD memory data on the "Status display area".
On (Advanced): Uses the smart coding.
Off: Does not use the smart coding.
Refer to "readme.txt" for model numbers and version
information of cameras that have the smart coding
(GOP control) function.
Important:
•When the recording starting time set on the schedule has arrived without communication between
the camera and the recorder, the SD memory
backup will not be executed.
•Do not set the SD memory backup function to the
same camera from multiple network disk recorders.
•The recording time of the acquired SD memory
data will be time of the camera. Adjust time of the
camera and the recorder using the NTP function
and the camera time auto synchronization function. If time is not adjusted, the SD memory
backup may not be available.
[Sub-stream recording]
Set the sub-stream recording*.
Note:
•All images may not be acquired at one time due to
the time between time tables of the schedule and
the total capacity of the images. The remaining
images will be acquired at the subsequent acquisition time.
•The image is not acquired during the following
cases. Playing the image/HTTP downloading/
Emergency recording
•If the following operations occur during acquiring
the SD memory data, the acquisition is paused.
Communication failure with the camera while
acquiring SD memory data/Entering in HDD management page of [Advanced setup]
[Sub-stream recording]
Set On/Off of the sub-stream recording*.
On: Uses the sub-stream recording.
Off: Does not use the sub-stream recording.
Default: Off
[Frame rate]
Select the frame rate of the sub-stream recording.
1 ips/ 3 ips/ 5 ips/ 10 ips
Default: 10 ips
[Bit rate]
Select the bit rate of the sub-stream recording.
64 kbps, 128 kbps, 256 kbps, 384 kbps,
512 kbps, 768 kbps
Default: H.264(2) 768 kbps, H.265(2) 512 kbps
Note:
•The sub-stream means H.264(2) or H.265(2).
44
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Make the frame rate of the pre-event recording to
the frame rate of the event recording]
Check to set the frame rate of the pre-event recording to the frame rate of the event recording. Uncheck
to return the frame rate to the standard settings (the
frame rate of the schedule recording). The setting is
only effective for Panasonic cameras.
* The sub-stream recording is a function to record
low-resolution image (less data volume) in addition
to the normal live image/recording image from cameras. Use it when you want to play back image efficiently while the unit is recording the high resolution
image.
The sub-stream recording is used for the following application.
•Playback on a 16-screen during use of the recorder
monitor
•Multi-display during use of image monitoring software (narrow band)
[Do not send the bit rate setting to a camera for
which the same frame rate is set for the basic setup, event recording and emergency recording]
The bit rate setting is not sent to the camera for which
the same frame rate is set for each recording when it is
checked. The setting is only effective for Panasonic
cameras.
[Special days]
Assign a schedule of another day individually as a
special day.
For example, if you set "January 1st" to "Sunday", the
recording will be performed as on Sunday, no matter
which day of the week January 1st is actually on.
The following screen of the special day will be displayed when the [Setup >] button is clicked.
[Month] [Day]
Select a date that you want to set as a special day.
[Mode]
Select a day whose schedule you want to use.
Default: None
■ Other setup
45
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings relating to monitors [Monitor]
The settings relating to the display of the main monitor or sub-monitor connected to the recorder are configured on the setup menu - the "Advanced setup" - the "Monitor" page.
The settings relating to image switching such as multiscreen display and sequence display of live images are
also configured on this page.
The "Monitor" page has 3 tabs; the [Main monitor] tab, the [Sub monitor] tab and the [Advanced setup] tab. The
settings relating to the display of the web browser can be set on the [Web browser] tab of the "Monitor" page
on the setup menu of the web browser. (☞ Page 192)
Set up the main monitor [Main monitor]
Perform settings relating to the main monitor display such as the display position of the camera title.
■ Live sequence (Wide view)
Set the sequence of the wide view screen on the
main monitor.
The following live sequence (Wide view) screen will be
displayed when the [Setup >] button is clicked.
■ Camera title
[Display]
Determine whether or not to display the camera title
on the main monitor.
On: Displays the camera title.
Off: Does not display the camera title.
Default: On
[Mode]
Select a screen pattern of the sequence.
1-screen live sequence/4-screen live sequence/
9-screen live sequence/16-screen live sequence
Default: 1-screen live sequence
[Position]
Select the position to display the camera title on
images.
L-Upper/ L-Lower/ R-Upper/ R-Lower
Default: R-Upper
[Keep aspect ratio]
Select whether to change the aspect ratio of the displayed area if the aspect ratio of the image is different
from the displayed area.
Checked: Keep aspect ratio (Does not change the
ratio automatically).
Not checked: Does not keep aspect ratio
(Changes the ratio automatically).
Default: Not checked
[Camera title]
Enter a camera title to display for each camera using
the on-screen keyboard (☞ Installation Guide page
8). (Up to 16 characters)
Note:
•When using together with the date and time display to be set on the camera (☞ Page 18) or
OSD (Display Title, ☞ Page 19), adjust the position to be displayed to not to overlap with them.
•The camera title configured on this setting will not
be embedded on recorded images.
[Duration]
Set the interval (duration) for switching camera
images.
3 s/ 5 s/ 10 s
Default: 5 s
46
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Note:
•Some cameras may take time to display images
and the screen may be switched before images
are displayed if the duration is short. In that case,
set a longer time for the switching interval.
[Stretch images to fit the areas in control screen
display]
Mark the checkbox to enlarge the vertical size of
images with the aspect ratio of 16:9 to fit into the
image display area on the control screen.
[Camera selection]
Select the cameras to be included in the sequence
display.
Mark the checkbox next to the desired camera. The
selected cameras will be displayed in numerical
order.
Note:
•If the image is expanded by this setting, the camera operation or the motion detection search in
the image may not function as the specified coordinates or area.
[Fix the HDMI output to the following video mode]
Fixes the signal system of the HDMI output when it is
checked. The signal system is selectable from 4K and
1080p.
Note:
•The selected cameras are displayed from the top
in the 4-screen, 9-screen and 16-screen live
sequence.
•The number of selected camera is within the number of split screens, it displays without switching
the cameras.
Note:
•4K output is p/30Hz(4K/30p). Depending on your
monitor, "ERROR" may be displayed, but you can
still use this product without problems.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Main monitor] tab.
[Activate the time-saving playback]
Mark the checkbox to activate the time-saving playback and play the recorded image up to 4 times
faster if there is no movement in the recorded image.
(For playback by the operation of the recorder)
(☞ Page 136)
■ Other setup
Click [Setup >] button to display the following screen.
Important:
•To use the time-saving playback, cameras that
support the motion detection search function are
necessary.
Refer to the "readme.txt" on the provided
CD-ROM about the supported cameras. Refer to
the operating instructions of the camera in use for
further information.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Main monitor] tab.
[Select multiscreen buttons displaying on wide
view operation panel]
The button whose checkbox is marked will be displayed on the wide view operation panel.
■ Other setup
[Auto-hide the status display panel and the operation panel in wide view]
Mark the checkbox to display or hide the status display panel and the operation panel in wide view in
association with whether the mouse cursor is displayed or hidden.
47
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings relating to sub monitors [Sub monitor]
Set up the sub monitor by selecting the camera images to display, the image display duration, etc.
[Keep aspect ratio]
Select whether to change the aspect ratio of the displayed area if the aspect ratio of the image is different
from the displayed area.
Checked: Keep aspect ratio (Does not change the
ratio automatically)
Not checked: Does not keep aspect ratio
(Changes the ratio automatically)
Default: Not checked
[Duration]
Set the interval (duration) for switching camera
images.
3 s/ 5 s/ 10 s
Default: 5 s
■ Camera title
[Display]
Set whether to display the camera title on the sub
monitor.
On: Displays the camera title
Off: Does not display the camera title
Default: On
Note:
•The terminal status (N.O. or N.C.) for supplying an
alarm signal to the alarm terminal depends on the
settings for "Terminal input" of "Advanced terminal alarm setup" (☞ Page 41).
•Some cameras may take time to display images
and the screen may be switched before images
are displayed if the duration is short. In that case,
set a longer time for the switching interval.
■ Display settings
Set the display sequence for camera images (image
switching).
[Mode]
Select how to display images from the cameras.
1-screen live sequence: Images from the cameras
will sequentially be switched and displayed on
1-screen.
4-screen live sequence: Images from the cameras
will sequentially be switched and displayed on
4-screen.
9-screen live sequence: Images from the cameras
will sequentially be switched and displayed on
9-screen.
16-screen live sequence: Images from the cameras will sequentially be switched and displayed
on 16-screen.
Switch by alarm terminal input: Switches camera
1 to 9 to display images on 1-screen according to the signal input triggered by the terminal
alarms from terminal 1 to 9.
24Screen: Images from the cameras will be displayed on 24Screen without switching the
screen.
32Screen: Images from the cameras will be displayed on 32Screen without switching the
screen.
[Camera selection]
Select the cameras to be included in the sequence
display.
Mark the checkbox next to the desired camera. The
selected cameras will be displayed in numerical
order.
Note:
•The selected cameras are displayed from the top
in the 4-screen, 9-screen and 16-screen live
sequence, 24Screen or the 32Screen.
•The number of selected camera is within the number of split screens, it displays without switching
the cameras even if the live sequence is selected.
48
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Secret view]
Secret view is a function that causes the camera
image displayed on a 1-screen or the selected camera image on a multiscreen on the main monitor to be
displayed as a black screen on the sub monitor.
Determine whether or not to use secret view.
On: Enables the secret view function.
Off: Disables the secret view function.
Default: Off
Note:
•While "1-screen live sequence" is being performed, the secret view images will be skipped
(not displayed).
•The image on the sub monitor may momentarily
go black when images are switched on the main
monitor.
Configure other settings relating to monitors
[Advanced setup]
Configure the audio output setting of the monitor and select the video format sent to the sub monitor.
[Video format of sub-monitor (BNC)]
Select NTSC system/PAL system as analogue video
to the sub monitor (BNC).
Note:
•If you want the audio output from the monitor, set
"On" in "Audio" of the "Advanced recording setup"
(☞ Page 38).
■ Other setup
[Detect a power-off of the sub monitor (HDMI)]
When the sub monitor is to be used and the checkbox is marked, the error action will be taken if the sub
monitor is disconnected or the power is off.
[Audio output camera]
The camera channel whose audio is output from the
recorder will be fixed. To fix the camera channel,
select the camera whose audio is to be output from
the recorder.
Selected camera: Does not fix the camera channel (The recorder will output the audio of the
camera whose images are being displayed.)
Cam.1 - Cam.32: Fixes the camera channel (The
recorder will always output the audio of the
selected camera.)
Default: Selected camera
Note:
•Depending on the monitor, it may not be detected
even if the power switch of the monitor is turned off.
[Display 1-screen live image on stream 2]
Mark the checkbox to display 1-screen live image on
stream 2.
49
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings relating to network [Network]
The settings relating to the network of the recorder are configured on the setup menu - the "Advanced setup"
menu - the "Network" page.
The "Network" page has [Basic], [e-Mail], [Panasonic alarm protocol] and [NTP/SNMP] tabs.
Configure the basic network settings [Basic]
The basic settings relating to the network can be configured on this tab.
Note:
•Enter the address octets and port numbers right-aligned. (Example: When the port number is 80, enter
"00080".) The leading zeros are omitted here.
■ Network Setup
Configure the network settings of the recorder.
[Line speed]
Specify the line speed for data transmission.
Auto: Line speed will be applied automatically.
100M-Full: 100 Mbps full-duplex
100M-Half: 100 Mbps half-duplex
10M-Full: 10 Mbps full-duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps half-duplex
Default: Auto [Camera/PC port]
Auto [PC port]
[IP address]
The IP address of the recorder will be displayed.
To change the IP address, click the [▲]/[▼] button.
Default: 192.168.0.250 [Camera/PC port]
0.0.0.0 [PC port]
[Subnet mask]
Select the subnet mask in accordance with the
recorder’s network environment. Enter in the same
way as the IP address.
Default: 255.255.255.0 [Camera/PC port]
0.0.0.0 [PC port]
Important:
•When the setup menu is closed after changing the
line speed, the recorder will automatically reboot.
■ DNS Setup
The settings relating to DNS (Domain Name System)
can be configured on this tab.
[Default gateway]
Select the address for the default gateway in accordance with the recorder’s network environment. Enter
in the same way as the IP address.
Default: 192.168.0.1
[DNS]
Determine whether or not to use the DNS.
Off
: Does not use the DNS.
Manual: When using DNS, it is possible to search
IP addresses by host name.
Default: Off
50
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
When using the "Viewnetcam.com"
service
[Primary server address]
[Secondary server address]
When the DNS is used, select the IP addresses for
the primary and secondary DNS server. Enter in the
same way as the IP address.
Default: 0.0.0.0
[Domain name]
Enter the domain name of the recorder. The first character of the domain name should be an alphabetical
character.
Enter 3 to 63 alphanumeric characters including
hyphens (-) and periods (.).
Default: localdomain
[Personal(Product) URL]
The URL of the camera registered for "Viewnetcam.
com".
When accessing the menu again after performing the
initial settings, the temporary URL will be displayed.
■ DDNS Setup
Select the DDNS service to determine whether or not
to use DDNS.
Off: Does not use the DDNS function.
Viewnetcam.com: Uses the "Viewnetcam.com"
service.
Default: Off
[Your account link]
The URL of the registration window for the "Viewnetcam.com" service will be displayed.
Register the information in the registration window to
enroll in the "Viewnetcam.com" service.
Note:
•"Viewnetcam.com" is a Dynamic DNS service
designed for use with Panasonic Network
Cameras. Refer to the "Viewnetcam.com" website
(http://www.viewnetcam.com/) for further information about the service.
[Access interval]
Select the interval to access the "Viewnetcam.com"
service server to check the IP address and the host
name from the following.
10 min/ 20 min/ 30 min/ 40 min/ 50 min/ 1 h
Default: 1 h
51
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Procedure to register information for the "Viewnetcam.com"
service
■ Other setup
Click the [Advanced >] button to set bandwidth control, HTTP port number, and FTP port number.
The setup menu (advanced) will be displayed.
Step 1
Access the URL displayed on "Your account link"
from the PC connected to the Internet.
→→ The registration window for "Viewnetcam.com"
will be displayed.
Step 2
Register the information for "Viewnetcam.com" by
following the instructions of the wizard.
→→ When the registration window is not displayed,
check that the PC is being connected to the Internet, and click the reload button of the browser.
When the message is displayed to inform that the
registration is successful, close the registration
window.
The URL selected at the time of registration can
be used for recorder access. However, this URL
is unavailable when accessing the recorder from
the PC connected to the same network (LAN).
■ Other setup
[HTTP port number]
Specify the HTTP port number to be used to send
images from the recorder.
It is unnecessary to change it for normal use.
1 - 65535
Default: 80
Note:
•When the registration for the "Viewnetcam.com"
service is completed, the URL of the recorder registered for "Personal(Product) URL". It may take
up to around 30 minutes until the URL of the registered recorder is validated.
•To cancel the enrollment in the "Viewnetcam.
com" service, access the "Viewnetcam.com"
website (http://www.viewnetcam.com/) later.
•It is possible to check the information registered
for the "Viewnetcam.com" service by accessing
the URL displayed beside "Your account link".
When the URL is not displayed, check that the
recorder is being connected to the Internet, exit
the menu, and display this tab again to check the
information.
•If access often fails due to the change in the
global address of router, set a smaller value for
"Access interval".
Note:
•Depending on the network settings, network communication may not be established if the HTTP
port number has been changed. In this case, refer
to the administrator of each network.
•The following numbers, the HTTPS port number,
the FTP port number, the site alarm receive port
number and the port number of the port forwarding are unavailable.
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 79, 105, 110,
123, 161, 162, 443, 546, 547, 995, 10001, 10002,
10003, 10004, 10005, 10006, 10007
52
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[FTP port number]
Designate the FTP port number of the recorder.
It is unnecessary to change it for normal use.
1 - 65535
Default: 21
[Port forwarding]
Set whether to enable the port forwarding or not.
On: Sets the port forwarding.
Off: Does not set the port forwarding.
[Port setup]
Set the port number of each camera between 1 to
65535 if the port forwarding is set.
Default: Cam.1 60001 ~ Cam.32 60032
Note:
•The following numbers, the HTTP port number,
the HTTPS port number, the site alarm receive
port number and the port number of the port forwarding are unavailable.
20, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 79, 80, 105, 110,
123, 161, 162, 443, 546, 547, 995, 10001, 10002,
10003, 10004, 10005, 10006, 10007
Note:
•The following numbers, the HTTP port number,
the HTTPS port number, the FTP port number, the
site alarm receive port number and the port number of other port forwarding are unavailable.
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 79, 80, 105, 110,
123, 161, 162, 443, 546, 547, 995, 10001, 10002,
10003, 10004, 10005, 10006, 10007
[Attach the alteration detection code (FTP)]
Determine whether or not to attach the alteration
detection code to the recorded images to be downloaded from an FTP server.
Off: Does not attach the alteration detection code.
On: Attaches the alteration detection code.
Default: Off
[Easy IP Setup accommodate period]
Set time to enable operation of the network settings
from the dedicated software to 20 minutes or unlimited from the launch of the recorder.
20 min: Enables operation to change the IP
address of the recorder from the dedicated
software for 20 minutes only after the launch
of the recorder.
Unlimited: Always enables operation to change
the IP address of the recorder from the dedicated software.
Default: 20 min
[Internet mode (This product → PC)]
Set this to transmit the camera live image (H.264/H.265)
via the Internet. It can transmit the H.264/H.265 image
with the settings of the broad band router kept the same
as the JPEG image transmission.
On: Uses the HTTP port to transmit the image
and audio.
Off: Uses the UDP port to transmit the image and
audio.
Auto: Uses the HTTP port to transmit the image
and audio if the network address of the destination is different from that of the recorder.
Default: Off
[Back] button
Click this button after completing the settings.
■ Port forwarding
Click the [Setup >] button to set the port forwarding.
53
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings relating to the mail notification [e-Mail]
The settings of alarm mail notice, the settings of warning mail (☞ Page 193) and the settings to use the mail
functions can be configured on this tab.
[Authentic method - Password]
Enter the password to be required together with the
user name for the authentication. Enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters excluding "&" listed in the
description of "Note". An entered character for the
password will be displayed as "*".
Note:
•Available characters are as follows.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! # $ % &‘ ( ) * + ,- . / : ; < = > ?
@[¥]^_`{|}~
[SMTP server address]
Enter an IP address or a name of the SMTP server to
send e-mails. The name of the SMTP server is available only when "Manual" is selected for "DNS" on the
[Basic] tab accessed from the "Advanced setup"
menu - the "Network" page of the setup menu. Enter
up to 255 alphanumeric characters including hyphens
(-) and periods (.).
[Sender’s address]
Enter the mail address of a sender. Entered mail
addresses will be displayed in the "From" (sender)
line. Enter up to 127 alphanumeric characters including hyphens (-), periods (.), @, and _.
Default: NWDR
[SMTP port number]
Enter the port number of the SMTP server.
1 - 65535
Default: 25
[Security]
Alarm mails or warning mails will be encrypted and
transmitted. Authentication method will be set to
"SMTP" if it is not set to "Off". Set the user name and
password for the authentication.
Off / SMTP over SSL / STARTTLS
Default: Off
[POP server address]
Enter an IP address or name of the POP server to be
used for POP before SMTP authentication. The name
of the POP server is available only when "Manual" is
selected for "DNS" on the [Basic] tab accessed from
the "Advanced setup" menu - the "Network" page of
the setup menu. Enter up to 255 alphanumeric characters including hyphens (-) and periods (.).
[Destination address - Address1 - Address4]
Enter the mail addresses of the recipients of the alarm
mail and the warning mail (☞ Page 193). Enter up to
255 alphanumeric characters including hyphens (-),
periods (.), @, and _.
Check the desired mail type (Warning/Alarm) to be
sent.
Up to 4 destination addresses can be registered.
[Authentic method]
Select the authentication method to send e-mails
from the following.
None/ POP before SMTP/ SMTP
Default: None
[Authentic method - User name]
Enter the user name to be required for the authentication. Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters excluding "&" listed in the description of "Note".
54
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the Panasonic alarm protocol settings
[Panasonic alarm protocol]
The settings to notify the PC of the event and error information when an event or an error occurs can be configured on this tab.
To display the event and error information, it is necessary that the software (option) is installed on the recipient
PC.
Refer to the "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM for details on the software.
[Port number(to PC)]
Enter the port number of the recipient PCs.
It is usually not necessary change the default.
Default: 1818
[Retry]
Set the number of retry attempts for the transmission
to the PC.
0 - 8 (times) (In steps of times)
Default: 2
Note:
•If the transmission to the PC fails, increase the
number of retry attempts.
[Destination address - Address1 - Address8]
Enter the addresses of the recipient PCs. Enter the IP
address or host name for "Address1" - "Address8".
The host name is available only when "Manual" is
selected for "DNS" on the [Basic] tab accessed from
the "Advanced setup" menu - the "Network" page of
the setup menu.
Up to 8 destination addresses can be registered.
Enter up to 255 alphanumeric characters including
hyphens (-) and periods (.).
55
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings relating to NTP/SNMP synchronization
[NTP/SNMP]
The settings to synchronize the system clock with the NTP (Network Time Protocol) and SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) server can be configured on this tab.
Important:
•It is possible to run the recorder as an NTP server
to be referred by the cameras. In this case, set the
port number of the camera to "123". Refer to the
operating instructions of the connected camera
for information on how to configure the settings of
the camera.
■ SNMP setup
Set this item to check the status of the recorder by
connecting to the SNMP server.
Enter the items using the alphanumeric characters
listed in "Note" (☞ Page 54) and symbols.
■ NTP setup
[Time adjustment]
Select "On" or "Off" to determine whether or not to
adjust the time according to the NTP server.
On:Adjusts the time automatically.
Off:Does not adjust the time automatically.
Default: Off
[Community]
Enter a name used for SNMP authentication (up to 32
alphanumeric characters).
[System name]
Enter a name (up to 255 alphanumeric characters) for
management of the recorder by the SNMP system.
Example: No.1
Important:
•Inaccuracy of time stamp on recorded images due
to inaccurate clock adjustment of this product
may cause operational problems. When the system operation requires an accurate time setting,
use the NTP auto time adjustment using an NTP
server.
[Location]
Enter a location where the recorder is installed. (up to
255 alphanumeric characters)
Example: 2F
[Primary server address]
[Secondary server address]
Enter the address or name of the NTP server when
adjusting the time using the NTP server.
The name of the NTP server is available only when
"Manual" is selected for "DNS" on the [Basic] tab
accessed from the "Advanced setup" menu - the
"Network" page of the setup menu.
Enter up to 255 alphanumeric characters including
hyphens (-) and periods (.).
[Contact]
Enter the contact information such as a mail address
of an administrator of this recorder. (up to 255 alphanumeric characters)
Note:
•Entering "http://" is not necessary if the server
name is entered.
56
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings relating to the user
management [User management]
The settings such as user authentication On/Off, administrator registration and operation levels can be configured on the setup menu - the "Advanced setup" menu - the "User management" page.
The "User management" page has [Basic], [User registration], [Administrator setup] and [Host registration] tabs.
Configure the basic settings relating to user management
[Basic]
The settings relating to login when using the mouse, user authentication for network operations, and user levels
can be configured on this tab.
[Auto logout]
Set the time to wait until auto logout when no operations are made while displaying live images.
Off: Does not logout to the recorder automatically.
After 1 min/ After 3 mins/ After 5 mins/
After 30 mins
Default: Off
Note:
•When "On" is selected for "Auto login", the user
will not be logged out automatically even if other
values than "Off" is selected for "Auto logout".
When logout is performed (☞ Page 102), login
will be automatically performed by the user registered in "Auto login user".
•To prevent inappropriate operations, it is recommended to select settings other than "Off" for
"Auto logout".
■ Operation
Configure the settings to enable auto login when turning on the recorder.
[Auto login]
Select "On" or "Off" to determine whether or not to
activate the auto login function.
On: Logs in to the recorder automatically.
Off: Does not log in to the recorder automatically.
Login is required when operating the recorder
from the logout status.
Default: On
■ Network
Determine whether or not to require user authentication for operating the recorder from a PC.
[Auto login user]
When "On" is selected for "Auto login", the users registered as auto login users in this setting can log in to
the recorder automatically. An auto login user should
be one of the users registered in the recorder.
Default: (Administrator)
[User authentication]
Select "On" or "Off" to determine whether or not to
authenticate the user.
On: Login followed by user authentication
Off: Login without user authentication
Default: On
[Quick login]
Select "On" or "Off" to determine whether to enter or
select the user name.
Off: User name needs to be entered.
On: Login by selecting a displayed user name.
Default: Off
[Host authentication]
Determine whether to enable or disable the host
authentication.
On: Login followed by host authentication.
Off: Login without the host authentication.
Default: Off
57
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
■ User level settings
Set up the operations allowed at each user level
(Administrator/Manager/Operator/Viewer) by marking
the respective checkboxes. To stop a user from operating certain functions, do not check the respective
function. The setting for the administrator cannot be
changed. The system can also be set up to allow only
live operation (image switching) after logout.
Note:
•Only a user logged in as "Administrator/Manager"
can change the user level settings.
•At the default, operations allowed at the user level
are as follows:
Administrator/Manager: Possible to perform all
the operations (Administrators)
Operator: Possible to perform a part of the settings of the recorder and alarm reset (Head of
operators)
Viewer: Possible to monitor or play the images
(Operators)
* Administrators and managers can perform all
operations. The difference between an administrator and a manager is that an administrator
has priority over a manager; if both perform the
same operation at the same time, that of the
administrator will have priority.
•The screenshot shows the default.
•When a user tries to operate a function that is not
checked (restricted function), the login window
may sometimes be displayed to prompt a user
with the required user level to log in.
Restrictable operations
It is possible to allow or restrict the following operations for each user.
Operation
Description
Camera operation
Camera images displayed on the main monitor can be changed.
Camera control
Camera control such as panning and tilting can be performed.
Search and playback
Recorded images can be played back and searched by VMD search.
Copy
Recorded images can be copied to storage media such as a USB.
Alarm reset
An alarm action can be canceled.
Error reset
An error action can be canceled.
Setup
Setup menus can be displayed and the settings can be configured.
Camera image display
The image and audio data of all cameras can be displayed/output. To set
up the display of camera images, click the [Setup >] button. (☞ Set up the
user level for individual cameras)
* It is recommended to restrict "Setup" to the administrator.
* Even if "Setup" is set to be available to each user, there will be some operations restricted to the administrator
only.
58
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set up the user level for individual cameras
Select the cameras allowed for operation by each user level (operator/viewer/logged out) by marking the
respective checkboxes.
Remove the check mark from any cameras not to be displayed. The setting for the administrator/manager cannot be changed.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Basic] tab.
Register, edit or delete the user information
[User registration]
Use this tab to register, edit or delete user names and passwords.
[Password]
Enter the user password using the on-screen keyboard (☞ Installation Guide Page 8). The password
must be between 8-32 characters including the halfwidth alphanumeric and the symbol. Use at least two
types of characters among alphabet, numbers and
symbols. The registered password will be displayed
as "*****" regardless of what is entered.
Important:
•For enhanced security, change the password on a
regular basis.
•If you forget the administrator name and the password, the recorder must be initialized (repair).
■ Register new user
Register user information such as a user name, password and operation level.
The maximum number of users that can be registered
is 32.
[User name]
Enter the user name using the on-screen keyboard
(☞ Installation Guide Page 8). The user name must
be between 1-32 characters including the half-width
alphanumeric and the symbol.
59
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Level]
Display the operation level of a user.
Operable functions can be set on the [Basic] tab
(☞ Page 57).
Manager/ Operator/ Viewer
* Administrator and manager both have the same
level, but the administrator has the higher priority.
Default: Operator
[Default screen]
Select a startup screen to be displayed after login.
Cam.1/ ... / Cam.32/ 4Screen-(1)/ ... /
4Screen-(8)/ 9Screen-(1)/ ... / 9Screen-(4)/
16Screen-(1)/ 16Screen-(2)/
Sequence(Wide view)/ 1Screen(Wide view)/
4Screen(Wide view)/ 9Screen(Wide view)/
16Screen(Wide view)/ 24Screen(Wide view)/
32Screen(Wide view)
(Refer to the "Operation window" section (☞ Page 99)
for further information about each setting value.)
Default: 4Screen-(1)
Note:
•When a monitor that is not selected in the
"Monitor" - "Main monitor" - "Other setup" is set
as the default screen, "4Screen-(1)" will be displayed as the default screen.
•When "9Screen", "16Screen" or any of wide view
screen is selected, the default screen on the web
browser of the PC will be set to 4-screen with live
images from camera 1 to 4.
[Registration] button
Select this button to newly register the edited user
information.
■ Edit user information
Edit or delete the user information that has been registered.
Select the user whose user information is to be edited
or deleted. To edit items, proceed as for new user
registration.
[Edit] button
Registers the edited user information.
[Delete] button
Deletes the selected user.
60
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Edit the administrator information [Administrator setup]
The administrator information relating to the password and default screen, etc. can be registered on this tab.
[Administrator name]
Enter the administrator name using the on-screen
keyboard (☞ Installation Guide Page 8). The administrator name must be between 1-32 characters including the half-width alphanumeric and the symbol.
[Password]
Enter the administrator password using the on-screen
keyboard (☞ Installation Guide Page 8). The password must be between 8-32 characters including the
half-width alphanumeric and the symbol. Use at least
two types of characters among alphabet, numbers and
symbols.
The registered password will be displayed as "*****"
regardless of what is entered.
Important:
•For enhanced security, change the password on a
regular basis.
[Password (Retype)]
Enter the password that has been set for "Password"
again for confirmation.
[Level]
Display the operation level of an administrator. It is
impossible to change the setting value for an administrator. "Administrator" has been set for the administrator.
[Default screen]
Select a startup screen to be displayed after login.
(☞ Page 60)
[Edit] button
Register the edited administrator information.
61
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Register, edit or delete host [Host registration]
Register, edit or delete the host information of the PC which can access to the recorder via the Internet.
■ Register new host
Register the host information that uses the recorder
such as the host IP address and the operation level.
Up to 32 hosts can be registered.
[Host IP address]
Enter the IP address.
• Enter the IP address in half width digits from 0 to
255.
• "*" can be used as a special character representing
all numbers.
• "0.0.0.0" and "*.*.*.*" cannot be registered.
[Level]
Select an operation level.
(Refer to the "User registration" for the setting contents).
Default: Manager
[Default screen]
Select a startup screen to be displayed after login on
the web browser.
Cam.1/ ... / Cam.32/ 4Screen-(1)/ ... / 4Screen-(8)
Default: 4Screen-(1)
[Registration] button
Registers the set host information as a new.
■ Edit host information
Change or delete the registered host information.
Select a host information to change or delete on
[Host IP address]. To edit items, proceed as for new
user registration.
[Edit] button
Registers the edited user information.
[Delete] button
Deletes the selected user.
62
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings relating to maintenance [Maintenance]
The version of the recorder and disk information is displayed, and the settings relating to hard disk drives can
be configured on the setup menu - the "Advanced setup" menu - the "Maintenance" page. It is also possible to
initialize the setup data of the setup pages, check the system logs and register the license on this page.
The "Maintenance" page has [System information], [HDD information] and [System management] tabs.
Check the system information such as the version
[System information]
The version (of the software and hardware), serial number, network information (MAC address, IP address, line
speed), temperature inside the recorder and highest temperature inside the recorder, etc. are displayed on this
tab.
Note:
•The recovery progress information is displayed
during the mirroring recovery or the RAID recovery.
■ SD card information of camera
The SD card information and the SD memory backup
progress of the camera in which the SD memory
backup is set are displayed. Click [View >] button to
display the following screen.
Note:
•System information will not be updated while the
"Maintenance" page is being displayed.
•Besides the setting value for "Line speed", the
actual line speed will be displayed in "( )".
•The current temperature in the body is higher than
the ambient temperature due to a temperature
increase of internal parts.
•The temperature increase of internal parts varies
according to the load on equipment.
•The thermal error makes an error action to prevent
failure or unsafety of equipment when temperature of internal parts (such as HDD and CPU)
exceeds the specified temperature.
[Software] Displays the software version of the camera.
[SD card model number] Displays the model number
of the SD memory card used for the camera.
[Operation time] Displays the operation time of the SD
memory card used for the camera.
[Overwrite time] Displays the number of the overwriting of the SD memory card used for the camera.
[Backup progress information] Displays the progress
of the SD memory backup.
Date & time display: Date and time of the image
being acquired from the SD memory card of
the camera.
- : No image data to be acquired from the SD
memory card of the camera is available.
■ Extension unit information
Displays the version information of the extension unit,
temperature information and recovery progress information. Click [View >] button to display the following screen.
Note:
•Read "readme.txt" in the CD-ROM provided with
the recorder for applicable cameras.
63
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Confirm the hard disk drive information [HDD information]
The capacity of the hard disk drive and the running time of this product or extension unit (EXT1 ~ EXT2), time
range of the recorded images, etc. will be displayed.
Screen in Single mode
(The display contents in RAID5/RAID6 mode
are also similar)
Screen in Mirroring mode
[Recorded time range]
Displays the time range of the images recorded on
the hard disk drives.
Note:
•HDD information will not be updated while the
"Maintenance" page is being displayed.
•The recovery progress information is displayed
next to the HDD operation mode display during
the mirroring recovery or the RAID recovery.
•If the recording group is set, [Camera recording
group check] is displayed and you can check it.
Note:
•When using in Mirroring mode/RAID5 mode/
RAID6 mode, "Operation time" will be displayed
for each hard disk drive respectively, while
"Capacity"/"Status"/"Recorded time range" will
be displayed together for multiple hard disk
drives.
[Operation mode of HDD]
Operation mode of HDD will be displayed to the right
of "HDD information" on the upper left of the table in
the screen.
Refer to page 74 for further information.
[Overwrite cycle]
Calculates and indicates the overwriting cycle of the
hard disk drives, based on the past recording performance (the date & time of the oldest recorded data,
the current date & time and the capacity of the hard
disk drive).
[Capacity]
Displays the capacities of the hard disk drives.
[Operation]
Displays the operating time of the hard disk drives.
Note:
•While overwriting recording is being performed,
the overwriting cycle will be calculated based on
the date & time of the oldest recorded data and
that of the newest recorded data.
•The more often the recording was performed in
the past, the more accurate the calculation of
overwriting cycle will be.
•When the recording conditions are changed or
when data is automatically deleted, the overwriting cycle will not be indicated accurately.
•Overwrite cycle will not be displayed when setting
the recording group.
[Status]
Displays the statuses of the hard disk drives.
Normal: Hard disk drives that are operating normally. The number indicates the order of
recording.
Playback-only: Hard disk drives for playback use
only (Recording is unavailable.)
Removed: Hard disk drives that are excluded
from operation due to fault
Error: Hard disk drives that have become faulty
during the format process
Blank: No HDD connected
Added: HDD cannot be used until it is formatted
64
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Set password for HDD viewer]
Set whether you will assign a password to the HDD
mounted on the recorder. Setting it to "On" allows
you to set a password to the HDD when removing
HDD. When you use a HDD with a password set in
HDD viewer, you need to enter the password.
On: Sets a password for the HDD.
Off: Does not set a password for the HDD.
Default: Off
Important:
•Removing the HDD without the removal process
of the HDD (☞ Page 73), the password is not
set in the HDD.
[Password]
Assign a password for HDD viewer using the onscreen keyboard. The password must be between
8-32 characters including the half-width alphanumeric
and the symbol. Use at least two types of characters
among alphabet, numbers and symbols. The set password will be displayed as "*****" regardless of what is
entered.
Important:
•If you forget the password of the removed HDD,
you cannot play back the HDD in HDD viewer.
[Retype password]
Enter the password that has been set for "Password"
again for confirmation.
[Save HDD viewer (to USB medium)]
Save HDD viewer to a USB medium (external storage
device). Click the [Execute >] button to display the
confirmation window to start saving. HDD viewer is
saved under the USB medium drive as a compressed
file (NX_HDD_Viewer.zip). Unzip the file to use it. The
operating instructions of HDD viewer are available on
the following Panasonic Support Website.
https://security.panasonic.com/download/
65
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings and operations relating to the system
[System management]
The settings relating to the actions at an error occurrence and auto data deletion from hard disk drives can be
configured on this tab. It is also possible to display the logs on this page. In addition, general maintenance,
such as license registration, setting initialization and firmware upgrade, can be performed on this tab.
On: Operates in the HDD stand-by control mode.
Off: Operates in the normal mode.
Default: Off
Note:
•In Single mode, it is effective when it consists of 3
or more HDD.
•In Mirroring (RAID1) mode, it is effective when it
consists of 6 or more HDD.
•In RAID5/RAID6 mode, it is effective when it consists of the recorder and 2 extension units.
•It may take time to play the data in the inactive
HDD during the HDD stand-by control mode.
•During the HDD stand-by control mode, the date
will not be displayed in white on the calendar of
the date and time operation panel even if there is
a recorded image (☞ Page 134).
•The number of recording event search (☞ Page
176) is not displayed during the HDD stand-by
control mode.
■ System setup
[Error output duration]
Select the duration to output a signal to notify the
external devices of an error (HDD error, camera error,
recorder error, recording error or network error).
When "0 s" is selected, the signal is not output.
0 s/ 2 s/ 5 s/ 10 s/ 20 s/ 30 s/ 1 min
Ext.: When "Ext." is selected, the signal will keep
on being output until the error is reset.
Default: 2 s
[HDD hour meter warning]
If the operation time of a hard disk drive reaches a
specified level, a warning will be performed. When
"Off" is selected, warning will not be performed.
Off/ 10000 h/ 20000 h/ 30000 h/ 40000 h/ 50000 h
Default: 20000 h
Note:
•Refer to the "Cancel the error action" section
(☞ Page 126) for how to reset the error.
[Error buzzer duration]
Configure the settings to sound a buzzer at an error
occurrence. When "0 s" is selected, buzzer will not
sound.
0 s/ 2 s/ 5 s/ 10 s/ 20 s/ 30 s/ 1 min
Ext.: When "Ext." is selected, the buzzer that
started sounding at an error occurrence will
keep on sounding until the buzzer is stopped.
Default: 2 s
[Auto data delete]
Select to determine how many days should have
passed from the recorded day to delete data automatically from the hard disk drive.
Off/ 1 day/ 2 days/ 3 days/ 4 days/ 5 days/ 6
days/ 7 days/ 8 days/ 9 days/ 10 days/ 14 days/
30 days/ 45 days/ 60 days/ 90 days/ 120 days/
150 days/ 180 days/ 184 days
Default: Off (Does not delete the data automatically.)
Note:
•Refer to the "Stop buzzer beeping" (☞ Page 125)
for further information about how to stop buzzer
beeping.
[Camera time auto synchronization]
When a date changes, the clock of the cameras will
be synchronized with the clock of this product.
On: Synchronized
Off: Not synchronized
Default: On
[HDD stand-by control mode]
Set a mode not to count the operation time of a hard
disk drive(HDD stand-by control mode) by temporarily
pausing HDDs other than those which are recording
or waiting for recording.
66
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
■ Logs
The following logs can be checked.
•Access log: Logs of accessing the recorder
•Operation log: Logs of operating the recorder
•Network log: Logs of network errors, etc.
POWER ON (MAINTENANCE): The recorder has
been rebooted by the operation of the setting
menu.
RESET HIGHEST TEMPERATURE: The highest
temperature information has been cleared.
About the network log
The network error logs (occurrence date & time and
error details) will be displayed in list form.
Up to 100 logs are saved. When more than 100 logs
are filed, the older logs will be overwritten by the
newer logs. In this case, the oldest log is the first to
be overwritten. Refer to page 92 for further information about the error logs.
To check each log, click the [View >] button.
Note:
•Information will not be updated while logs are
being displayed.
About the access log
The date & time when logged in/out for the recorder,
the user name, and the IP address will be displayed.
Up to 500 logs are saved.
When more than 500 logs are filed, the older logs will
be overwritten by the newer logs. In this case, the
oldest log is the first to be overwritten.
**LOGIN/**LOGOUT: A user has logged in/out the
recorder.
** indicates a user name or an IP address.
■ Functions for maintenance
License is added to operate the recorder. In addition,
settings and operations are also performed for maintenance of the recorder.
[Registration of license (This product, camera
extension, etc.)]
To use the recorder, it is necessary to obtain the
"Registration Key" from the key management system
and to register the license. Up to 32 cameras can be
added by registering the license of the additional
camera kit.
Contact your dealer for additional cameras. Also,
when using the business intelligence function or the
RAID function, it is necessary to register the license.
Clicking the [Setup >] button will open the registration
window to register the license. (☞ Page 68)
About the operation log
The operation log displays specific operations of the
recorder and their dates and time in a list.
Up to 500 logs are saved.
When more than 500 logs are filed, the older logs will
be overwritten by the newer logs.
CONFIG LOGIN / CONFIG LOGOUT: A host has
logged in/out the "HDD management" page.
UPDATE SETTINGS: Settings have been changed.
POWER ON: The power of the recorder has been
turned on.
POWER ON(UPDATE): The recorder is rebooted
after the software is updated.
POWER ON(RESTART SWITCH): The recorder is
rebooted by pushing the Restart button.
BEFORE TIME CHANGE MANUALLY: Before the
system clock has been changed
AFTER TIME CHANGE MANUALLY: Just after the
system clock has been changed
BEFORE TIME CHANGE BY NTP: Before the system clock has been changed by NTP
AFTER TIME CHANGE BY NTP: Just after the
system clock has been changed by NTP
HDD FORMAT: The HDD has been formatted.
RESET ALL SETTINGS: The settings have been
reset.
[Registration of license (Security)]
The registration of the secure communication license
allows you to perform secure communication with up
to 32 cameras. Contact your dealer for secure communication.
Click the [Setup >] button to display the license registration screen. For setting details, refer to the "Operating Instructions Secure Communication Kit" on
the provided CD-ROM.
[Registration of license (Optional extension)]
You can activate the optional functions by registering
additional licenses.
Click the [Setup >] button to display the registration
window of license.
67
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Reset all settings]
Initializes the setting data. Click the [Execute >] button to display the confirmation window for starting
initialization.
[Firmware update]
Loads the software saved on a USB medium (external
storage device) into the recorder to upgrade the firmware.
Click the [Execute >] button to display the confirmation window to start initializing.
Only an administrator can execute the firmware
update.
Note:
•The following setting items will not be reset to the
default or loaded.
• HTTP port number
• FTP port number
• Network port
• DNS Setup
• License number
• Operation mode of HDD
• Recording group
Note:
•Depending on the firmware to be updated, it may
take up to 30 minutes for upgrading, leaving the
start screen displayed.
•Usage time varies depending on the capacity of
the USB medium or the recording content. Retry
again later if you fail in operation.
•Do not operate the recorder with multiple USB
medium connected.
•Use the USB medium formatted in exFAT, FAT
(FAT 16) or FAT 32.
•USB medium recognized by this recorder can be
formatted by the recorder. Refer to page 146 for
the format procedures.
•USB medium with password authentication or
requiring a dedicated driver or with the encryption
function are not available.
•Contact your dealer for further information about
the firmware update.
[Save data (to USB medium)]
Saves the setting data on the USB medium. Click the
[Execute >] button to display the confirmation window
to start saving.
[Load data (from USB medium)]
Loads the setting data saved on a USB medium
(external storage device) into the recorder. Click the
[Execute >] button to display confirmation window to
start loading.
Important:
•Click the [Set] button to save the settings and
leave the menu after loading data.
[Other]
The page to save the maintenance data will open.
(☞ Page 70)
Register the licenses for the recorder and the additional
camera [Registration of license]
The licenses to operate the recorder and to add cameras are registered. The license for 16 cameras are included
when purchasing the recorder. Cameras can be added to 24 or 32 units by adding the license. Also, when using
the business intelligence function or the RAID function, it is necessary to register the license.
To register the options, the "Registration Key" that can be obtained from the Key Management System is
required. Refer to the provided "Activation Key Card" to obtain the "Registration Key" of this product. Refer to
the "Activation Key Card" of the additional camera kit (WJ-NXE30, WJ-NXE30W) for how to obtain the "Registration Key" to add cameras.
Important:
•After registering the "Registration Key" for the recorder or that for the Additional Business Intelligence Kit,
be sure to click the [Restart] button to reboot the recorder. The license will not be effective before the
recorder is rebooted.
• When the Registration Key of this product is registered
• When the license of the additional camera kit, the additional business intelligence kit, or additional RAID
kit is added
• When the license of the concurrent user license kit is added
•The added cameras shall be registered on "Easy start" (☞ Installation Guide Page 33). Each setting value
is the default. Configure each setting according to your needs.
68
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
[Additional business intelligence - Registration Key]
When you use the additional business intelligence
function, enter the registration key of the Additional
Business Intelligence Kit. Refer to the Operating
Instructions of the Additional Business Intelligence Kit
(WJ-NXF02, WJ-NXF02W) for the detailed setting
methods and operations of the additional business
intelligence function.
[Additional RAID - Registration Key]
To use the additional RAID function, enter the registration key of the additional RAID kit. Refer to the
"Activation Key Card" provided with the additional
RAID kit for how to obtain the registration key. Click
the [Registration >] button right to the entry field to
display the license registration window.
[Entry information of the key management system]
This is the ID number required to obtain the "Registration Key". The Activation Key Card provided with
the recorder describes how to access the key management system.
[Dealer’s information]
Up to two pieces of information, such as a dealer name
and its telephone number, can be registered using the
on-screen keyboard (☞ Installation Guide Page 8).
Registration is possible for a maximum of 32 characters
for each entry field.
[Registration of license]
Register the "Registration Key" to operate the
recorder and activate the extra functions.
[Product - Registration Key]
Enter the "Registration Key" obtained from the key
management system. When the [Registration >] button next to the entry field is clicked, the registration
window to register the license. When using the
recorder for the first time, be sure to register the
"Registration Key".
Click the [Restart] button after entering the items. The
recorder will reboot, and the settings will be applied.
[Back] button
By clicking this button when license is not activated
or when only "Dealer’s information" is changed, the
display will return to the [System management] tab.
[Additional camera - Registration Key 1-2]
To add cameras, enter the registration key of the
additional camera kit. Registering the registration key,
the number of connected cameras is increased as follows.
WJ-NXE30, WJ-NXE30W
No Registration Key
16
Registration Key 1
24
Registration Key 2
32
Refer to the "Activation Key Card" of the additional
camera kit for how to obtain the "Registration Key" to
add cameras. The registration window will be displayed when the [Registration >] button on the right
side of the field is clicked.
69
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Execute functions for special maintenance and service [Other]
All logs can be saved on the USB medium (external storage device) or the date and time of the camera can be
synchronized with this product.
Important:
•Since this setting will change the settings of all
cameras, please take an extra caution in case that
the settings of each camera are customized individually.
[Acquire the SD backup data from camera]
Starts to acquire the image (SD memory data)
recorded on the SD memory card of the camera in
which the SD memory backup is set.
[Reboot this product]
Reboots the recorder.
[Save maintenance data (to USB medium)]
Save all logs on the USB medium (external storage
device).
Saving of the logs will start by executing on the confirmation window displayed by clicking the [Execute] button.
[Boot this product in the board replacement mode.]
Used to replace the board.
Note:
•The board replacement mode is used during
maintenance. Do not use it in ordinary operation.
•Contact your dealer for the board replacement.
Note:
•Do not operate the recorder with multiple USB
medium connected.
•Use the USB medium formatted in exFAT, FAT
(FAT 16) or FAT 32.
•USB medium recognized by this recorder can be
formatted by the recorder. Refer to page 146 for
the format procedures.
•USB medium with password authentication or
requiring a dedicated driver or with the encryption
function are not available.
•Usage time varies depending on the capacity of
the USB medium or the recording content. Retry
again later if you fail in operation.
[Clear the maximum temperature record information.]
Clears the highest temperature record information.
[Synchronize the camera's time with this unit]
Time and date of all the registered cameras will be
synchronized with the clock of this product. The time
and date synchronization will be executed when the
setting is completed after executing on the confirmation window displayed by clicking the [Execute] button.
[Synchronize the camera's settings with this unit]
Reconfigure the settings of all the registered cameras
based on the setting information of this product. The
time and date synchronization will be executed when
the setting is completed after executing on the confirmation window displayed by clicking the [Execute]
button.
70
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Manage the hard disk drives [HDD management]
The operations relating to the hard disk drives such as checking the capacity of each recording area and formatting the drives can be performed on the "HDD management" page of the setup menu - the "Advanced
setup" menu.
Important:
•All other operations such as recording and playback will stop when the "HDD management" page is displayed.
•Displaying the "HDD management" page forcibly logs out any other users currently logged in to the
recorder.
How to display the "HDD management" page
Click the [Operation] button to return from the "HDD
management" page to the operation screen.
Step 1
Click the [HDD management] button of the setup
menu - the "Advanced setup" menu.
→→ The window with the administrator name and
password entry fields will be displayed. The window is also displayed when a user has already
logged in as the administrator.
Step 2
Click the [OK] button after entering "Administrator
name" and "Password" of an administrator.
→→ The "HDD management" page will be displayed.
71
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Check the hard disk drive information [General]
The capacities, operation time and statuses of the hard disk drives of this product or extension unit (EXT1 ~
EXT2) are displayed.
Screen in Single mode
(The display contents in RAID5/RAID6 mode
are also similar)
Screen in Mirroring mode
Refer to the setup menu - the "Advanced setup" menu - the "Maintenance" page - the [HDD information] tab for
further information about the items displayed on the [HDD information] tab. (☞ Page 64)
When the recording group is set, the information of [Recording group] will be displayed to the right of
[Recorded time range].
The following explanations are using the single mode screen.
Format the hard disk drives [Format HDD]
Hard disk drives are formatted. It is necessary to initialize the HDD after replacing the HDD.
Important:
•When a hard disk drive is formatted, all the recorded images will be erased.
Step 1
Click the [Execute >] button for "Format HDD" on the
[General] tab - [HDD management] page.
→→ The window to format hard disk drives will be displayed.
Step 2
Step 2
Check the hard disk drives to format in the "Format"
field, and click the [Start] button. To start formatting,
click the [OK] button on the confirmation window displayed.
When "OK" is displayed on the "Results" field, click
the [Back] button.
When "Error" is displayed, format the hard disk drives
again.
72
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
About the removal process and the link process of hard disk
drives
When replacing hard disk drives, it is necessary to perform the removal process/ the link process.
Be sure to consult the dealer for the removal, installation, and the related process of hard disk drives.
Remove the HDD [Remove HDD]
Step 1
Step 2
Click [Execute >] on the [Remove HDD].
→→ The HDD removing screen will be displayed.
Check the HDDs to remove, and click the [Start] button.
The HDDs can be removed when "OK" is displayed in
the "Results" field. Click the [Back] button.
Note:
•If a password is assigned for HDD viewer, the
HDD is also assigned with a password.
Add the HDD [Add HDD]
Step 1
Step 2
Click [Execute >] on the [Add HDD].
→→ The HDD adding screen will be displayed.
Check the HDDs to add, and click the [Start] button.
The process is completed when "OK" is displayed in
the "Results" field and the HDDs are ready for recording. Click the [Back] button.
Important:
•When the link process is performed, the data will be erased.
73
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
About the change of the HDD operational mode
About the HDD operational mode
Single mode: Mirroring mode: RAID5 mode:
RAID6 mode:
Images and audio from the cameras will be recorded on each HDD in order.
The same images and audio from the cameras will be recorded on 2 HDDs like HDD1
and HDD2, HDD3 and HDD4.
When one of the 2 HDDs is replaced with a new one, it is possible to copy data (Mirroring recovery) on the other HDD to the replaced HDD. This product or the extension
unit requires 2 or more HDDs.
Even if one of the HDDs becomes faulty, recorded images can be recovered using the
other remaining HDDs in this mode. This product or the extension unit requires 3 or
more HDDs.
Even if 2 of the HDDs become faulty, recorded images can be recovered using the
other remaining HDDs in this mode. This product or the extension unit requires 4 or
more HDDs.
Important:
•When using Mirroring mode, RAID5 mode or RAID6 mode, it is necessary to register the license of
Additional RAID kit (WJ-NXR30, WJ-NXR30W). (☞ Page 69)
Change the operation mode of HDD [Change the operation mode of HDD]
Important:
•When the license of additional RAID kit is not
registered, only [Single mode] is displayed in
[Operation mode of HDD].
•When the operational mode of HDD is changed
(except the case that the operational mode is
changed from the Mirroring mode to the Single
mode), all data on the HDDs will be erased.
•The capacity of the HDD in the Mirroring mode will
become almost half if compared with the Single
mode.
•When the operational mode of HDD is changed
from the Mirroring mode to the Single mode, the
status of the HDD will turn to "Playback-only".
•When "Operation mode of HDD" is changed, the
recorder will be automatically rebooted.
•While operating in RAID5 mode and RAID6 mode,
you cannot add or remove the one HDD unit
described on page 73.
•While operating in RAID5 mode and RAID6 mode,
you cannot add the HDD where video has been
recorded in Single mode or Mirroring mode, and
playback as playback use only HDD.
Step 1
Click the [Execute >] button on the "Change the operation mode of HDD" section.
→→ The "Change the operation mode of HDD" window will be displayed.
Step 2
Step 2
Select the desired operation mode of HDD, and then
click the [Start] button.
74
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Set the recording group [Recording group setup]
You can set two groups of recording period (unlimited, 1 to 184 days) and assign each camera to either one.
Also, you can set a HDD used for recording of each group.
Note:
•If either "Group1" or "Group2" are set other than
"Unlimited" for the recording group, the recording
group is displayed on each screen of the HDD
management and of the HDD information of the
Maintenance page.
Step 1
Click the [Execute >] button on the [Recording group
setup]
→→ The recording group setup window will be displayed.
Step4
Click the [Recalculate] button to calculate estimated
required capacity of each group and display it.
Note:
•When "Unlimited" is set, the estimated capacity
will be displayed as " - ".
Step 5
Click the [Execute >] button on the "Assign recording
group to HDD".
→→ The [Assign recording group to HDD] screen will
be displayed.
Step 2
Set the recording period of each group.
[Group1]
Set the recording period of Group1.
Unlimited/ 1 day/ …/ 10 days/ 14 days/ 30 days/
45 days/ 60 days/ 90 days/ 120 days/ 150 days/
180 days/ 184 days
Default: Unlimited
[Group2]
Set the recording period of Group2.
Unlimited/ 1 day/ …/ 10 days/ 14 days/ 30 days/
45 days/ 60 days/ 90 days/ 120 days/ 150 days/
180 days/ 184 days
Default: Unlimited
Step 6
Set the recording group of each HDD in a way that
the HDD capacity displayed at the top of the screen
exceeds the estimated required capacity.
In Mirroring mode, RAID5 mode, and RAID6 mode,
set the recording group for each unit.
Note:
•If "Unlimited" is selected, recording will continue
as long as possible for the set HDD.
•If the number of days is set, playback will only
show the set period.
Step 7
Click the [OK] button to close and click the [Back]
button on the recording group setup screen to complete the settings.
Step 3
Set the recording group of each camera.
[Recording group]
Group1, Group2
Default: Group1
Important:
•If "Assign recording group to HDD" is changed,
the HDD data will be deleted.
75
[Setup via recorder's main monitor]
Configure the settings relating to the extra functions [Extra function]
Set the security and the additional business intelligence function settings on the extra function page of
[Advanced setup] on the setup menu.
Refer to the Operating Instructions of the Secure Communication Kit for the detailed setting methods and operations of the secure communication function. Refer to the Operating Instructions of the Additional Business
Intelligence Kit (WJ-NXF02, WJ-NXF02W) for the detailed setting methods and operations of the additional
business intelligence function.
■ Security between this product and PC
Connect the recorder and the PC with the HTTPS.
The HTTPS encodes the access to the recorder and
enhances the safety of the communication.
[Connection]
Set the connection.
HTTP & HTTPS: The HTTP and HTTPS connections are available.
HTTPS: The HTTPS connection is only available.
Default: HTTP & HTTPS
[HTTPS port number]
Set the port number used for the HTTPS.
1 - 65535
Default: 443
Note:
•The following numbers, the HTTP port number,
the site alarm receive port number and the port
number of the port forwarding are unavailable.
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 79, 80, 105, 110,
123, 161, 162, 546, 547, 995, 10001, 10002,
10003, 10004, 10005, 10006, 10007
76
Lists of the setting items (Setup menu)
Quick setup (Easy Start)
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Date & time adjustment
Available range
Default
2016/1/1 0:00 - 2037/12/31 23:59
20nn/mm/1 0:00
("nn" and "mm" are
calculated base on the serial
number of the recorder.)
Set time zone
GMT-12:00, GMT-11:00, GMT-10:00, GMT-9:00, GMT-5:00 (WJ-NX300K),
GMT (WJ-NX300K/G)
GMT-8:00, GMT-7:00, GMT-6:00, GMT-5:00,
GMT-4:30, GMT-4:00, GMT-3:30, GMT-3:00,
GMT-2:00, GMT-1:00, GMT, GMT+1:00,
GMT+2:00, GMT+3:00, GMT+3:30, GMT+4:00,
GMT+4:30, GMT+5:00, GMT+5:30, GMT+5:45,
GMT+6:00, GMT+6:30, GMT+7:00, GMT+8:00,
GMT+9:00, GMT+9:30, GMT+10:00, GMT+11:00,
GMT+12:00, GMT+13:00
Checked
Activate the Daylight saving time
Checked/Not checked
Recording setup Frame rate
1 ips, 3 ips, 5 ips, 10 ips, 15 ips, 30 ips
10 ips
(The same setting Image quality
NQ, FQ, SF, XF
FQ
for all cameras)
Audio
Off, On, On(AAC-LC)
Off
Referenced recording (Calculated result will be displayed.)
(Calculated result will be
days
displayed.)
Basic setup
(Remarks: "●" are the setting items configured on "Easy Start". "◎" are the setting items configured
from the web browser. "★" are the setting items only configurable with web browser.)
Menu/Tab
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Available range
Default
Remarks
Date & time
adjustment
Date & Time
2016/1/1 0:00 - 2037/12/31
23:59
20nn/mm/1 0:00
("nn" and "mm" are
calculated base on
the serial number of
the recorder.)
Date & time
settings
Display format Date
yyyy/mm/dd, Mmm/dd/yyyy, Mmm/dd/yyyy
dd/Mmm/yyyy, mm/dd/yyyy, (WJ-NX300K),
dd/mm/yyyy
dd/mm/yyyy
(WJ-NX300K/G)
◎
Time
24 h, 12 h
12 h (WJ-NX300K),
24 h (WJ-NX300K/G)
◎
Set time zone
Refer to "Set time zone" of
"Quick setup (Easy Start)".
Refer to "Set time
zone" of
"Quick setup (Easy
Start)".
◎
Daylight saving time
Out, Auto
Auto
◎
Start/End date and
time
Designate by day of the
week, Designate by date
Designate by day of
the week
◎
In: The last Sunday
in March, 1:00 this
year and subsequent
years.
Out: The last Sunday
in October, 1:00 this
year and subsequent
years.
◎
Date/Language
Time zone
Start/End date and
00:00 Monday, 1st week of
time (Designate by day January ~ 23:59 the last
of the week) In/Out
Sunday of December
77
●
◎
Menu/Tab
Date & time
settings
Language
Camera
Camera
registration
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Default
Remarks
Time zone
Start/End date and time
1/1 00:00 ~ 12/31 23:59
(Designate by date) In/Out
In: --/-- --:-Out: --/-- --:--
◎
Auto time
adjustment
−
Off
◎
00:00
◎
Off, Slave, Master
Operation time and date 00:00 ~ 23:00
Language
Japanese/ English/ Français/ English (Web
Español/ Deutsch/ Italiano/ browser: English)
Русский/ Português/ ไทย/ 中
文 (Web browser: Japanese/
English/ Français/ Español/
Deutsch/ Italiano/ Russian/
Português/ Thai/ Chinese)
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Model
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Address
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Compression
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Error information
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Registered
information
Corresponding camera
number/Option
(Address)
(Blank)
Model/Option
Address
Compression
Camera setup
Available range
Date & time
display
Display title
Indicator
Transmission
priority
(Blank)
User name
H.265(1), H.265(3), H.265(4), (Blank)
H.264(1), H.264(3), H.264(4),
MJPEG
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Password
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Port No.
(Port No.)
80
Display (check box)
Checked/Not checked
Display (drop-down
list)
Position (check box)
Off, On
Position (drop-down
list)
Camera selection
L-Upper, L-Lower, R-Upper,
R-Lower
Checked/Not checked
Display (check box)
Display (drop-down
list)
Display Title (check
box)
Display Title
Camera selection
Indicator
Checked/Not checked
Off, On
Camera selection
Checked/Not checked
Setting items
(Transmission priority)
Stream1
Frame rate, Advanced VBR,
VBR
Checked/Not checked
Stream2
Checked/Not checked
Setting items
(Priority setting)
Priority setting
Checked/Not checked
Setting items
(Burst tolerance level)
Checked/Not checked
Checked/Not checked
(Text will be entered.)
Checked/Not checked
On, On (Access), Off
Image quality priority, Frame
rate priority
Checked/Not checked
78
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Menu/Tab
Camera setup
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Transmission Burst tolerance level
priority
Setting items
(Control time period)
Control time period
1 h, 6 h, 24 h, 1 week
Refresh
interval
Refresh interval
0.2 s, 0.5 s, 1 s, 2 s, 3 s
Camera selection
Checked/Not checked
Upside-down
Upside-down
On (desktop), Off (ceiling),
Wall
Checked/Not checked
Pan/tilt-flip
Super
Dynamic
(Wide dynamic
range)
Adaptive black
stretch
Off, On (Advanced)
Checked/Not checked
Camera selection
0 °(Off), 90 °, 180 °(Upsidedown), 270 °
Checked/Not checked
Pan/tilt-flip
Off, On
Camera selection
Checked/Not checked
Super Dynamic
(Wide dynamic range)
Camera selection
Off, On, On (High)
Adaptive black stretch
Off, On
Camera selection
Checked/Not checked
Checked/Not checked
Back light
Back light
compensation compensation (BLC)
(BLC)
Camera selection
Off, On
Light control
mode
Outdoor scene, Indoor
scene (50Hz), Indoor scene
(60Hz), ELC
Checked/Not checked
Light control mode
Camera selection
Auto slow
shutter
(Maximum
shutter)
Auto slow shutter
(Maximum shutter)
Day & Night
(IR/electrical)
Day & Night
(IR/electrical)
Camera selection
Camera selection
Intelligent auto Intelligent auto
VMD alarm
Checked/Not checked
Off (1/30 s), Max. 2/30s,
Max. 4/30s, Max. 6/30s,
Max. 10/30s, Max. 16/30s
Checked/Not checked
Off, On, On (IR Light On),
Auto1 (Normal)/Auto, Auto2
(IR Light), Auto3 (SCC)
Checked/Not checked
Off, On
Camera selection
Checked/Not checked
VMD alarm
Off, On
Detection sensitivity
1(Low), 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15(High)
Checked/Not checked
Camera selection
Microphone
sensitivity
Microphone sensitivity
Microphone selection
Connection method
Remarks
Checked/Not checked
Checked/Not checked
Image rotation Image rotation
Default
High, Middle, Low
Setting items (Smart
coding (GOP control))
Smart coding
(GOP control)
Camera selection
Camera selection
Advanced
setup
Available range
0 High sensitivity, 1, 2, 3
Default, 4, 5 Low sensitivity
Checked/Not checked
1
RTP, RTSP, Internet mode
RTSP
79
◎
Menu/Tab
REC & event
Recording
setup
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Available range
Default
Schedule1
Mon, Tue, ..., Sun
Days to record
Schedule1
Time
Schedule
Schedule to
table1
bar
record
Checked/Not checked
Checked
--:--, 00:00 - 24:00
Schedule bar 1:
00:00 - 24:00
Schedule bar 2 ~
Schedule bar 6: --:-- --:-Checked
Schedule
Checked/Not checked
recording
Event recording Checked/Not checked
e-Mail
Recording
setup (All
cameras)
Schedule1
Advanced
setup
Checked/Not checked
Panasonic
Checked/Not checked
alarm protocol
Frame rate
1 ips, 3 ips, 5 ips, 10 ips,
15 ips, 30 ips
Image quality
NQ, FQ, SF, XF
Referenced recording
days
Days to record (Mon,
Tue, ..., Sun)
Event
Event
recording recording
duration
Pre-event
duration
Schedule Time table1to record Schedule bar
Remarks
Checked
Not checked
Not checked
10 ips
●
FQ
●
(Calculated result will be
(Calculated result
displayed.)
will be displayed.)
Time table1, Time table2, Off Time table1
◎
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s,
30 s
1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min,
10 min, 15 min, Manual, Ext.
0 s, 5 s, 10 s, 15 s
0s
◎
--:--, 00:00 - 24:00
◎
◎
Time table1Schedule
recording
Time table1Event recording
Time table1e-Mail
Time table1Panasonic
alarm protocol
Time table2Schedule bar
Checked/Not checked
Schedule bar 1:
00:00 - 24:00
Schedule bar 2 ~
Schedule bar 6: --:-- --:-Checked
Checked/Not checked
Checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
--:--, 00:00 - 24:00
◎
Time table2Schedule
recording
Time table2Event recording
Time table2e-Mail
Time table2Panasonic
alarm protocol
Display the
schedule list.
Checked/Not checked
Schedule bar 1 ~
Schedule bar 6: --:-- --:-Checked
Checked/Not checked
Checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
80
◎
◎
Menu/Tab
Recording
setup
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Days to record (Mon,
Schedule2 ~
Tue, ..., Sun)
Schedule16
Advanced
Event
Event
setup
recording recording
duration
Pre-event
duration
Schedule Time table1to record Schedule bar
Advanced
recording
setup
Available range
Default
Remarks
Time table1, Time table2, Off Time table1
◎
30 s
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s,
1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min,
10 min, 15 min, Manual, Ext.
0 s, 5 s, 10 s, 15 s
0s
◎
--:--, 00:00 - 24:00
◎
◎
Time table1Schedule
recording
Time table1Event recording
Time table1e-Mail
Time table1Panasonic
alarm protocol
Time table2Schedule bar
Checked/Not checked
Schedule bar 1 ~
Schedule bar 6: --:-- --:-Checked
Checked/Not checked
Checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
--:--, 00:00 - 24:00
◎
Time table2Schedule
recording
Time table2Event recording
Time table2e-Mail
Time table2Panasonic
alarm protocol
Display the
schedule list.
Checked/Not checked
Schedule bar 1 ~
Schedule bar 6: --:-- --:-Checked
Checked/Not checked
Checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
(Registered information will
be displayed.)
(Registered information will
be displayed.)
When the aspect ratio is 4:3
VGA(640×480)/
SVGA(800×600)/
SXVGA(1280×960)/
UXGA(1600×1200)/
QXGA(2048×1536)/
5M(2560×1920)/
12M(4000×3000)
When the aspect ratio is 16:9
HVGAW(640×360)/
HD(1280×720)/
FHD(1920×1080)/
WQHD(2560×1440)/
4KUHD(3840×2160)
When the aspect ratio is 1:1
1.6M(1280×1280)/
4M(2048×2048)/ 5M(2192×2192)/
8M(2816×2816)/ 9M(2992×2992)
When the aspect ratio is 9:16
0.2M(360×640)/ 1M(720×1280)/
2M(1080×1920)
(Registered information
will be displayed.)
(Registered information
will be displayed.)
VGA(640×480)
Model
Compression
Image capture size
81
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Menu/Tab
Recording
setup
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Advanced
Rate
recording
setup
Quality
Audio
◎
Off
◎
◎
Schedule1
◎
Same as the basic
◎
Same as the basic
◎
(Calculated result
will be displayed.)
2s
◎
2s
◎
Ext.
◎
On
◎
◎
◎
Main monitor action
Off, On, On(ACK/RESET)
Off
Event type
Checked/Not checked
Display
Ctrl screen, Wide view
Terminal alarm:
Checked
Camera site alarm:
Checked
Command alarm:
Checked
Ctrl screen
Off, Recording only,
Recording & alarm action
Save, Not save
Recording & alarm
action
Save
Setup by terminal
(Recording camera)
Off, Cam.1, ..., Cam.32, All
Setup by terminal
(Preset)
Setup by terminal
(Terminal output)
Setup by terminal
(Terminal input)
Mode
001 - 256, ---
Camera number
associated with the
terminal number
---
Off, On
On
◎
N.O., N.C.
N.O.
◎
Off, Recording only,
Recording & alarm action
Save, Not save
Recording & alarm
action
Save
◎
Off, Cam.1, ..., Cam.32
Camera number
◎
◎
001 - 256, ---
---
◎
Off, On
On
◎
Emergency
Referenced recording
days
Output duration
Buzzer duration
Auto reset time
Advanced
Mode
terminal alarm
setup
Alarm log
Advanced
camera site
alarm setup
1 ips, 3 ips, 5 ips, 10 ips, 15 ips, 10 ips
25 ips, 30 ips, 50 ips, 60 ips
NQ, FQ, SF, XF
FQ
Remarks
Message display
Event
Alarm action
Default
[Camera]
Off, On, On(G.711)*,
On(AAC-LC)
[Network Microphone]
Off, Cam.1, ..., Cam.32
Schedule1, Schedule2, ...,
Schedule16
1 ips, 3 ips, 5 ips, 10 ips,
15 ips, 25 ips, 30 ips, Same
as the basic
1 ips, 3 ips, 5 ips, 10 ips,
15 ips, 25 ips, 30 ips, Same
as the basic
(Calculated result will be
displayed.)
0 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s,
1 min, Ext., Rec.
0 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s,
1 min, Ext., Rec.
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s,
1 min, 3 min, 5 min, Ext.
Off, On
Schedule
Event setup
Available range
Alarm log
Setup by camera
(Recording camera)
Setup by camera
(Preset)
Setup by camera
(Terminal output)
* Only selectable while non-Panasonic camera is connected.
82
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Menu/Tab
Event setup
Advanced
setup
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Advanced
Mode
command
alarm setup
Alarm log
Available range
Default
Remarks
Off, Recording only,
Recording & alarm action
Save, Not save
Recording & alarm
action
Save
Off, Cam.1, ..., Cam.32
Camera number
◎
◎
001 - 256, ---
---
◎
◎
Setup by command
number (Recording
camera)
Setup by command
number (Preset)
Setup by command
number (Terminal
output)
Recording mode
Off, On
On
◎
Off, On
On
Alarm disarm duration
2 s, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s
2s
Panasonic alarm port number
(Port No.)
1818
Recording time of emergency
recording
SD backup rec.
30 s, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 30 s
min, 15 min, 30 min, Manual,
Ext.
Off, On
Off
◎
◎
◎
◎
Smart coding (GOP control)
Off, On (Advanced)
Off
Sub-stream
recording
Sub-stream recording
Off, On
Off
Frame rate
1 ips, 3 ips, 5 ips, 10 ips
10 ips
Bit rate
Special days
Other setup
64 kbps, 128 kbps, 256 kbps,
384 kbps, 512 kbps, 768 kbps
1/1 ~ 12/31
Day: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu,
Fri, Sat, Sun
Make the frame rate of Checked/Not checked
the pre-event recording
to the frame rate of the
event recording
Do not send the bit rate Checked/Not checked
setting to a camera for
which the same frame
rate is set for the basic
setup, event recording
and emergency
recording
83
768 kbps (H.264(2))
512 kbps (H.265(2))
---
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Not checked
◎
Not checked
◎
Advanced setup
Menu/Tab
Monitor
Main monitor
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Available range
Default
Camera title
Display
Off, On
On
Position
L-Upper, L-Lower, R-Upper, R-Upper
R-Lower
(Text will be entered.)
CAM1, ..., CAM32
Camera title
Live sequence
(Wide view)
Other setup
Mode
1-screen live
sequence
Keep aspect ratio
1-screen live sequence,
4-screen live sequence,
9-screen live sequence,
16-screen live sequence
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
Duration
3 s, 5 s, 10 s
5s
Camera selection
Checked/Not checked
Checked
Remarks
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Select multiscreen
buttons displaying on
wide view operation panel
1-screen
Checked/Not checked
Checked, Fixed
4-screen
Checked/Not checked
Checked
6-screen
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
9-screen
Checked/Not checked
Checked
16-screen
Checked/Not checked
Checked
24-screen
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
32-screen
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
1-screen (pillar box)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
4-screen (pillar box)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
9-screen (pillar box)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
12-screen (pillar box)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
16-screen (pillar box)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
3-screen (unequally
divided)
9-screen (unequally
divided)
16-screen (unequally
divided)
3-screen (mixed ratio)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
4-screen (mixed ratio) Checked/Not checked
Not checked
2-screen (vertical)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
3-screen (vertical)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
4-screen (vertical)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
5-screen (vertical)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
6-screen (vertical)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
7-screen (vertical)
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
Auto-hide the status Checked/Not checked
display panel and the
operation panel in
wide view
Stretch images to fit
Checked/Not checked
the areas in control
screen display
Not checked
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Not checked
◎
Other setup
84
Menu/Tab
Main monitor
Sub monitor
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Fix the HDMI output to
Other setup
the following video mode
Fix the HDMI output to
the following video mode
Activate the timesaving playback
Camera title
Display
Available range
Default
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
4K, 1080p
4K
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
Off, On
On
1-screen live
sequence
◎
◎
Keep aspect ratio
1-screen live sequence,
4-screen live sequence,
9-screen live sequence,
16-screen live sequence,
Switch by alarm terminal
input, 24Screen, 32Screen
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
Duration
3 s, 5 s, 10 s
5s
Camera selection
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
Secret view
Off, On
Off
Group display
Off, On
Off
Group title
(Text will be entered.)
Display settings Mode
Web browser
Group display
of camera tree
Grouping
Advanced
setup
Audio output camera
Network
Basic
Network Setup
[Camera/PC
port]
Network Setup
[PC port]
◎
◎
◎
◎
★
★
★
◎
Detect a power-off of Checked/Not checked
the sub monitor (HDMI)
Display 1-screen live
Checked/Not checked
image on stream 2
Checked
◎
◎
Not checked
◎
IP address
(IP address)
192.168.0.250
Subnet mask
(IP address)
255.255.255.0
Default gateway
(IP address)
192.168.0.1
Line speed
IP address
Auto, 100M-Full, 100M-Half, Auto
10M-Full, 10M-Half
(IP address)
0.0.0.0
◎
◎
◎
◎
Subnet mask
(Subnet mask)
Default gateway
(Common settings with the
192.168.0.1
Camera/PC port)
Auto, 100M-Full, 100M-Half, Auto
10M-Full, 10M-Half
Off, Manual
Off
Video format of sub-monitor (BNC)
Other setup
G1: Group1, …,
G8: Group8
G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6, G7, Cam.1 ~ Cam.16: G1
G8
Cam.17 ~ Cam.32: G2
Selected camera, Cam.1, ..., Selected camera
Cam.32
NTSC, PAL
NTSC
Remarks
Line speed
0.0.0.0
◎
◎
◎
◎
Primary server address (IP address)
0.0.0.0
Secondary server address (IP address)
0.0.0.0
Domain name
(Text will be entered.)
localdomain
DDNS Setup
DDNS
Off, Viewnetcam.com
Off
Other setup
HTTP port number
(Port No.)
80
FTP port number
(Port No.)
21
Attach the alteration
detection code (FTP)
Internet mode (This
product → PC)
Off, On
Off
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Off, On, Auto
Off
◎
DNS Setup
DNS
85
Menu/Tab
Basic
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Other setup
Port forwarding
Port setup
Available range
Off, On
On
(Port No.)
60001 (Cam.1) ~
60032 (Cam.32)
20 min
Easy IP Setup
20 min, Unlimited
accommodate period
e-Mail
e-Mail setup
Panasonic
alarm protocol
Panasonic
alarm protocol
NTP/SNMP
NTP setup
SNMP setup
User management
Basic
Operation
User level
settings
Remarks
◎
◎
◎
SMTP server address
SMTP port number
POP server address
Authentic method
User name
Password
Sender's address
Security
Destination address
(Address)
Destination address
(Warning)
Destination address
(Alarm)
Port number(to PC)
Retry
Destination address
(Address)
Time adjustment
Primary server address
Secondary server
address
Community
System name
Location
Contact
(Text will be entered.)
(Port No.)
(Text will be entered.)
None, POP before SMTP, SMTP
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
Off, SMTP over SSL, STARTTLS
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
25
(Blank)
None
(Blank)
(Blank)
NWDR
Off
(Blank)
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Checked/Not checked
Checked
◎
Checked/Not checked
Checked
◎
(Port No.)
0, ..., 8
(Text will be entered.)
1818
2
(Blank)
◎
◎
◎
Off, On
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
Off
(Blank)
(Blank)
◎
◎
◎
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
◎
◎
◎
◎
Auto login
Auto login user
On
(Administrator)
◎
◎
Off
Off
◎
◎
User authentication
Host authentication
Camera operation
Off, On
(Select from the registered
user names.)
Off, On
Off, After 1 min, After 3 mins,
After 5 mins, After 30 mins
Off, On
Off, On
Checked/Not checked
◎
◎
◎
Camera control
Checked/Not checked
Search and playback
Checked/Not checked
On
Off
Manager: (Checked,
Fixed)
Operator: (Checked,
Fixed)
Viewer: (Checked,
Fixed)
Logged out: Checked
Manager: (Checked,
Fixed)
Operator: Checked
Viewer: Not checked
Logged out: (Not
checked, Fixed)
Manager: (Checked,
Fixed)
Operator: Checked
Viewer: Checked
Logged out: (Not
checked, Fixed)
Quick login
Auto logout
Network
Default
86
◎
◎
Menu/Tab
Basic
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
User level
Copy
settings
Available range
Default
Checked/Not checked
Manager: (Checked,
Fixed)
Operator: Not checked
Viewer: Not checked
Logged out: (Not
checked, Fixed)
Manager: (Checked,
Fixed)
Operator: Checked
Viewer: Not checked
Logged out: (Not
checked, Fixed)
Manager: (Checked,
Fixed)
Operator: Checked
Viewer: Not checked
Logged out: (Not
checked, Fixed)
Manager: (Checked,
Fixed)
Operator: Not checked
Viewer: Not checked
Logged out: (Not
checked, Fixed)
Manager: (Checked,
Fixed)
Operator: Checked
Viewer: Checked
Logged out: Checked
(Blank)
(Blank)
Operator
4Screen-(1)
◎
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
Administrator
4Screen-(1)
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
(Blank)
Manager
4Screen-(1)
◎
◎
◎
Alarm reset
Checked/Not checked
Error reset
Checked/Not checked
Setup
Checked/Not checked
Camera image
display
Checked/Not checked
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
Manager, Operator, Viewer
Cam.1, ... , Cam.32,
4Screen-(1), ... , 4Screen-(8),
9Screen-(1), ... , 9Screen-(4),
16Screen-(1), 16Screen-(2),
Sequence(Wide view),
1Screen(Wide view),
4Screen(Wide view),
9Screen(Wide view),
16Screen(Wide view),
24Screen(Wide view),
32Screen(Wide view)
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
(Text will be entered.)
Administrator
Cam.1, ... , Cam.32,
4Screen-(1), ... , 4Screen-(8),
9Screen-(1), ... , 9Screen-(4),
16Screen-(1), 16Screen-(2),
Sequence(Wide view),
1Screen(Wide view),
4Screen(Wide view),
9Screen(Wide view),
16Screen(Wide view),
24Screen(Wide view),
32Screen(Wide view)
(IP address)
Manager, Operator, Viewer
Cam.1, ... , Cam.32,
4Screen-(1), ... , 4Screen-(8)
User
registration
Register new
user
User name
Password
Level
Default screen*
Administrator
setup
Edit
administrator
information
Administrator name
Password
Password (Retype)
Level
Default screen*
Host
registration
Register new
host
Host IP address
Level
Default screen*
* The available range of the default screen differs according to the number of camera licenses.
87
Remarks
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
Menu/Tab
Maintenance
System
information
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Software version
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Serial number
Network port
[PC port]
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
MAC address
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
IP address
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Line speed
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
MAC address
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
IP address
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Line speed
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Internal temperature
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Highest temperature
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Extension unit
information
Software
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Internal temperature
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Recovery progress
information
Software
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
SD card model
number
Operation time
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Overwrite time
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Backup progress
information
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Capacity
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Operation
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Status
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Recorded time range
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Recording group
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Overwrite cycle
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Camera recording group check
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Set password for HDD viewer
Off, On
Off
Password
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Retype password
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Save HDD viewer (to USB medium)
(None)
(None)
Download HDD viewer
(None)
(None)
SD card
information of
camera
System
management
Default
Hardware version
Network port
[Camera/PC
port]
HDD
information
Available range
System setup
Error output duration
0 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 2 s
1 min, Ext.
Error buzzer duration 0 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 2 s
1 min, Ext.
HDD stand-by control mode Off, On
Off
HDD hour meter
warning
Auto data delete
Logs
Off, 10000 h, 20000 h,
20000 h
30000 h, 40000 h, 50000 h
Off, 1 day, ..., 10 days, 14 days, Off
30 days, 45 days, 60 days,
90 days, 120 days, 150 days,
180 days, 184 days
Off, On
On
Camera time auto
synchronization
Access log (Date &
(Indication only)
Time / Log)
Operation log (Date & (Indication only)
Time / Log)
Network log (Date &
(Indication only)
Time / Log)
88
Remarks
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
★
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
◎
Menu/Tab
System
management
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Entry
MPR ID
information of
the key
Activation Key No.
management
system
Registration ID
Registration of
license
Additional
camera
Available range
Default
(None)
◎
◎
◎
◎
Product-Registration
Key
Registration Key 1
(Text will be entered.)
(Unique number given
to the device)
Refer to the Activation
Key Card.
Refer to the Activation
Key Card.
(Blank)
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Registration Key 2
(None)
(None)
Remarks
◎
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Additional
Registration Key
business
intelligence
Additional RAID Registration Key
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Dealer's information
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Secure communication
Registration Key 1~32
(Text will be entered.)
(Blank)
Total number of
licenses
Reset all settings
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
◎
◎
◎
(None)
(None)
◎
Save data (to USB
medium)
Load data (from USB
medium)
Firmware update
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
◎
(None)
(None)
◎
(None)
(None)
◎
(None)
(None)
Boot this product in
the board
replacement mode.
Clear the maximum
temperature record
information.
Single mode, Mirroring
mode, RAID5, RAID6*1
(None)
◎
◎
(None)
(None)
◎
Capacity
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Operation*2
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Status
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Recorded time range
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
Recording group
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
HDD information
(Capacity)
HDD information
(Operation)*2
HDD information
(Status)
HDD information
(Recording group)
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
Functions for
maintenance
Save maintenance data
(to USB medium)
Synchronize the
camera's time with
this unit
Synchronize the
camera's settings
with this unit
Acquire the SD backup
data from camera
Reboot this product
HDD management
General
HDD
information
Format HDD
89
◎
Menu/Tab
General
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Format HDD
HDD information
(Format)
HDD information
(Results)
Remove HDD
HDD information
(Capacity)
HDD information
(Operation)*2
HDD information
(Status)
HDD information
(Recording group)
HDD information
(Remove)
HDD information
(Results)
Add HDD
HDD information
(Capacity)
HDD information
(Operation)*2
HDD information
(Status)
HDD information
(Recording group)
HDD information
(Add)
HDD information
(Results)
Change the
HDD information
operation mode (Capacity)
of HDD
HDD information
(Operation)*2
HDD information
(Status)
HDD information
(Recording group)
HDD information
(Results)
Operation mode of
HDD
Recording
Group1
group setup
Available range
Default
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
Checked/Not checked
Not checked
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
Checked/Not checked
Checked
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
◎
Mirroring mode*3
◎
Unlimited
◎
Unlimited
◎
Recording group
Single mode, Mirroring
mode, RAID5, RAID6*1
Unlimited, 1 day, …, 10 days,
14 days, 30 days, 45 days,
60 days, 90 days, 120 days,
150 days, 180 days, 184 days
Unlimited, 1 day, …, 10 days,
14 days, 30 days, 45 days,
60 days, 90 days, 120 days,
150 days, 180 days, 184 days
Group1, Group2
Group1
◎
Connection
HTTP & HTTPS, HTTPS
HTTP & HTTPS
HTTPS port number
(Port number)
443
◎
◎
Connection
HTTP, HTTPS
HTTP
Port number
(Port number)
443
Data encryption
setting
Off, On
Off
Group2
Extra function
Security
Security between
this product and
PC
Security
between this
product and
camera*4
90
Remarks
◎
◎
◎
Menu/Tab
Business
intelligence*5
Setting item (including those of the
"Advanced setup" menu)
Face matching Face matching alarm
Available range
Default
Off, On
Cam.1: Off,
Cam.2: Off
Cam.1: On,
Cam.2: On
Cam.1: Non-shared,
Cam.2: Non-shared
Save
Face matching output Off, On
Statistics
Face
registration
Concurrent user Concurrent
license
user license
Usage pattern
Non-shared, Share
Alarm log
Save, Not save
Accumulate statistics Off, On
data
Usage pattern
Non-shared, Share
Registration listSensitivity
Registration listFace image
Registration listAppearance
Registration listName
Registration listMatching
Client Identifier/
Date&Time/Status
1(Low), 2, 3, 4, 5(High)
Cam.1: Off,
Cam.2: Off
Cam.1: Non-shared,
Cam.2: Non-shared
3
(None)
(None)
(None)
(None)
(Text will be entered.)
On, Off
"Person01", ... ,
"Person100"
Off
(Indication only)
(Indication only)
*1 When registering the additional RAID kit (option) license except Single mode.
*2 When recording group is set, it is not displayed in browser.
*3 When the additional RAID kit (option) license is not registered, it will be Single mode.
*4 When registering the secure communication kit (option) license.
*5 When registering the additional business intelligence kit (option) license.
91
Remarks
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
About the error logs and the network logs
Error logs
This section describes the display contents on the status display panel of the main monitor, the logs of error
occurrence (error logs) and their details.
The display contents of each error logs are common between the main monitor and the web browser.
•"x" indicates the extension unit number.
•"y" indicates the HDD (hard disk drive) number.
•"f" indicates the cooling fan number.
•"cc" indicates the camera number.
Output from
connector
Display of the status display
panel
Error log
Thermal error warning
Thermal error: MAIN
Thermal error: EXTx
Thermal error: MAIN
Thermal error: EXTx
Recorder error
FAN warning
Fan error: MAIN f
Fan error: EXTx f
Fan error: MAIN f
Fan error: EXTx f
Recorder error
NW camera error detection
Communication error:
Cam.cc
Communication error:
Cam.cc
Camera error
NW camera error recovery
–
Communication recovered:
Cam.cc
–
NW camera error detection (audio)
Audio communication error:
Cam.cc
Audio communication error:
Cam.cc
Camera error
NW camera error recovery (audio)
–
Audio communication
recovered: Cam.cc
–
Video loss (Notification of video input
signal loss occurred on the encoder)
Video loss: Cam.cc
Video loss: Cam.cc
Camera error
Video loss recovery (Notification of
video input signal loss recovered on
the encoder)
–
Video recovered: Cam.cc
–
Recording error detection
Recording error
Recording error (RCA)
Recording error (AGT):
Cam.cc
Recording error (WCK):
Cam.cc
HDD error /
Recording error
output
SMART warning
SMART warning: MAIN-y
SMART warning: EXTx-y
SMART warning: MAIN-y
SMART warning: EXTx-y
HDD error /
Recording error
output
Slow response
Slow response: MAIN-y
Slow response: EXTx-y
Slow response: MAIN-y
Slow response: EXTx-y
HDD error /
Recording error
output
HDD hour meter warning
Hour meter warning: MAIN-y
Hour meter warning: EXTx-y
Hour meter warning: MAIN-y
Hour meter warning: EXTx-y
HDD error /
Recording error
output
HDD skip*
–
HDD skip: MAIN-y
HDD skip: EXTx-y
HDD skip: EXTx
–
HDD write error
–
Write error: MAIN-y
Write error: EXTx-y
–
HDD read error
–
Read error: MAIN-y
Read error: EXTx-y
–
Alteration detection
Altered: Cam.cc
Altered: Cam.cc
Recorder error
Remove auto links (per HDD)
HDD removed: MAIN-y
HDD removed: EXTx-y
HDD logically removed:
MAIN-y
HDD logically removed:
EXTx-y
HDD error /
Recording error
output
Description
92
Output from
connector
Display of the status display
panel
Error log
HDD format error
Format error: MAIN-y
Format error: EXTx-y
Format error: MAIN-y
Format error: EXTx-y
HDD error /
Recording error
output
HDD removal error (Properly
recognized HDD was removed without
proper operations.)
Swap warning: MAIN-y
Swap warning: EXTx-y
Swap warning: MAIN-y
Swap warning: EXTx-y
HDD error /
Recording error
output
Reboot (Related to CPU)
–
System reboot (Related to
CPU)
–
Reboot (Related to DEC)
–
System reboot (Related to
DEC)
–
Failed to write data on the media
Copy error
Write error: USB
–
Failed to read the data from the media
–
Read error: USB
–
Copy media FULL
–
No available space: USB
–
Number of data on the copy medium
exceeded
–
Over limitation: USB
–
NW link error
Network link error
Network link error: Camera/
PC port
Network link error: PC port
Network error
Line speed warning (When line speed
becomes "Half" while "Auto" is being
set)
Line speed warning
Line speed warning:
Camera/PC port
Line speed warning: PC port
–
When time is not adjusted due to the
time difference of 1000 second or more
from the NTP server
Skip time adjustment
Skip time adjustment
–
Failed to resolve an address of
Panasonic alarm protocol from DNS
–
Address error: PANASONIC
ALARM
Network error
No response from a notified address of
Panasonic alarm protocol
–
No response: PANASONIC
ALARM
Network error
Undefined error of Panasonic alarm
protocol
–
Other error: PANASONIC
ALARM
Network error
Remove auto links (per unit)
HDD removed: MAIN
HDD removed: EXTx
HDD logically removed:
MAIN
HDD logically removed:
EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
RAID5 Format error
Format error: MAIN
Format error: EXTx
RAID5 Format error: MAIN
RAID5 Format error: EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
RAID6 Format error
Format error: MAIN
Format error: EXTx
RAID6 Format error: MAIN
RAID6 Format error: EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
RAID5 1down
RAID5 1down: MAIN
RAID5 1down: EXTx
RAID5 1down: MAIN
RAID5 1down: EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
RAID5 2down
RAID5 2down: MAIN
RAID5 2down: EXTx
RAID5 2down: MAIN
RAID5 2down: EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
RAID6 1down
RAID6 1down: MAIN
RAID6 1down: EXTx
RAID6 1down: MAIN
RAID6 1down: EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
RAID6 2down
RAID6 2down: MAIN
RAID6 2down: EXTx
RAID6 2down: MAIN
RAID6 2down: EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
Description
93
Output from
connector
Display of the status display
panel
Error log
RAID6 3down
RAID6 3down: MAIN
RAID6 3down: EXTx
RAID6 3down: MAIN
RAID6 3down: EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
RAID5 Recovery failure
RAID5 Recovery failure:
MAIN
RAID5 Recovery failure:
EXTx
RAID5 Recovery failure:
MAIN
RAID5 Recovery failure:
EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
RAID6 Recovery failure
RAID6 Recovery failure:
MAIN
RAID6 Recovery failure:
EXTx
RAID6 Recovery failure:
MAIN
RAID6 Recovery failure:
EXTx
HDD error /
Recording
error output
Parameter initialization error
–
Invalid unit: MAIN
Invalid unit: EXTx
–
Reboot (No extension unit connection
detected)
–
System reboot(EXT)
–
Mirroring Format error
Format error: MAIN-y,y
Format error: EXTx-y,y
Format error: MAIN-y,y
Format error: EXTx-y,y
HDD error /
Recording
error output
Mirroring 1down
RAID1 1down: MAIN-y,y
RAID1 1down: EXTx-y,y
RAID1 1down: MAIN-y,y
RAID1 1down: EXTx-y,y
HDD error /
Recording
error output
Starting mirroring recovery
–
Starting mirroring recovery:
MAIN-y,y
Starting mirroring recovery:
EXTx-y,y
–
Complete mirroring recovery
–
Complete mirroring recovery:
MAIN-y,y
Complete mirroring recovery:
EXTx-y,y
–
Mirroring recovery failure
Mirroring recovery failure:
MAIN-y,y
Mirroring recovery failure:
EXTx-y,y
Mirroring recovery failure:
MAIN-y,y
Mirroring recovery failure:
EXTx-y,y
HDD error /
Recording
error output
Undetected sub monitor
Undetected sub monitor
Undetected sub monitor
–
Starting RAID5 recovery
–
Starting RAID5 recovery:
MAIN
Starting RAID5 recovery:
EXTx
–
Starting RAID6 recovery
–
Starting RAID6 recovery:
MAIN
Starting RAID6 recovery:
EXTx
–
Complete RAID5 recovery
–
Complete RAID5 recovery:
MAIN
Complete RAID5 recovery:
EXTx
–
Complete RAID6 recovery
–
Complete RAID6 recovery:
MAIN
Complete RAID6 recovery:
EXTx
–
Camera SD Card error
Backup error: Cam.cc
[SD]Card error: Cam.cc
Camera error
Camera SD Write start failure
Backup error: Cam.cc
[SD]Start error: Cam.cc
Camera error
Camera SD Write end failure
Backup error: Cam.cc
[SD]End error: Cam.cc
Camera error
Camera SD List failure
Backup error: Cam.cc
[SD]Get list error: Cam.cc
Camera error
Camera SD Image acquisition failure
Backup error: Cam.cc
[SD]Get image error: Cam.cc
Camera error
Description
94
Output from
connector
Description
Display of the status display
panel
Camera SD Image delete failure
Backup error: Cam.cc
[SD]Delete image error:
Cam.cc
Camera error
Camera SD Accumulated recording
time notice
SD life notice:
Cam.cc
[SD]Long-term use notice:
Cam.cc
–
Camera SD Accumulated recording
time warning
SD life warning: Cam.cc
[SD]Long-term use warning:
Cam.cc
Camera error
Camera SD Overwrite notice
SD life notice:
Cam.cc
[SD]Overwrite notice: Cam.
cc
–
Camera SD Overwrite warning
SD life warning: Cam.cc
[SD]Overwrite warning: Cam.cc
Camera error
Camera SD Access error
SD access warning: Cam.cc
[SD]Access warning: Cam.cc
Camera error
Camera hardware error
Hardware error: Cam.cc
Hardware error: Cam.cc
Camera error
Wiper rubber replacement notice
Wiper rubber: Cam.cc
Wiper rubber: Cam.cc
Camera error
NW camera error detection (video)
Communication error:
Cam.cc
Communication error:
Cam.cc
Camera error
NW camera error recovery (video)
–
Video communication
recovered: Cam.cc
–
Recorder login error
Login error
Login error
–
Error log
* "HDD skip" is the function that continues recording on another hard disk drive even if an error occurs, such as
an HDD write error.
95
About the network log
This section describes the details on the network logs and their details. The network logs are displayed by
selecting the "Maintenance" page - [System management] tab - [Network log] on the setup menu.
Contents to be displayed are the same as when using the web browser.
Description
Network log
Output from
connector
E-mail transmission complete
<SMTP>MAIL_SEND
–
SMTP authentication error
<SMTP>SMTP_ATTEST_ERR
Network error
POP3 authentication error
<SMTP>POP3_ATTEST_ERR
Network error
Failed to resolve POP3 server address from DNS
<SMTP>POP3_ADD_ERR
Network error
Failed to find POP3 server
<SMTP>POP3_SVR_ERR
Network error
Failed to resolve SMTP server address from DNS
<SMTP>SMTP_ADD_ERR
Network error
Failed to find SMTP server
<SMTP>SMTP_SVR_ERR
Network error
MAIL FROM command error
<SMTP>MAIL_FROM_ERR
Network error
RCPT TO command error
<SMTP>RCPT_TO_ERR
Network error
Other errors for SMTP
<SMTP>OTHER_ERR
Network error
FTP server transfer complete
<FTP>SVR_FWD_OK
–
Other error for FTP
<FTP>OTHER_ERR
Network error
Synchronization with the NTP server complete
<NTP>GET_TIME_OK
–
Failed to resolve NTP server address from DNS
<NTP>SVR_ADD_ERR
Network error
Synchronization with the NTP server failed (Time is not
synchronized.)
<NTP>TIME_INVALID
Network error
Failed to adjust the time
<NTP>SET_TIME_ERR
Network error
Failed to find NTP server
<NTP>SVR_ERR
Network error
Other errors for NTP
<NTP>OTHER_ERR
Network error
Password error for SNMP user name
<SNMP>USER_PASS_ERR
Network error
SNMP object inquiry failure
<SNMP>OBJ_ERR
Network error
Other errors for SNMP
<SNMP>OTHER_ERR
Network error
Password error for HTTP user name
<HTTP>USER_PASS_ERR
Network error
HTTP download failure
<HTTP>DOWNLOAD_ERR
Network error
HTTP request invalid
<HTTP>REQUEST_ERR
Network error
Other errors for HTTP
<HTTP>OTHER_ERR
Network error
96
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Operation window
The recorder can be operated using the provided mouse connected to the mouse connection port on the
recorder. When operating the recorder using a web browser, refer to "Network" (☞ Page 152).
Main monitor (A monitor to display the live image, the playback image and the setup menu)
The main monitor is used to switch between the control screen and the wide view.
Ctrl screen
This screen will be displayed after startup. Main operations of this product can be performed on this screen.
①
③
②
④
① Image display area
Displays images from the camera. (☞ Page 104)
② Status display panel
Displays the statuses of the recorder. Also displays alarm/error status and remedies. (☞ Page
100)
③ Operation panel, Date & time operation panel,
Camera control panel
Used to switch between screens, to play back
recordings, operate the camera and so on. Displays the current date & time.
④ [Wide view] button
Switches the main monitor to wide view display.
97
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Wide view display
This view offers a large image display area, especially suited for monitoring live images. However, operations
are restricted.
①
②
③
① Image display area
Displays images from the camera. (☞ Page 104)
④
③ Operation panel
Switches between screens and screen patterns,
playback recordings and so on.
Displays the current date & time.
② Status display panel
Displays the statuses of the recorder. Also displays alarm/error status and remedies. (☞ Page
100)
When clicking alarm button or error button, this
panel may be displayed overlapped on the operation panel.
④ [Ctrl screen] button
Switches the main monitor to control screen display.
Image display area
Playback images and live images will be displayed.
Camera selection
frame
Date & time
Camera title
Camera title/date & time
The set camera title will be displayed. The display
position can be selected from upper-left ("L-Upper"),
lower-left ("L-Lower"), upper-right ("R-Upper") and
lower-right ("R-Lower"). The default display position
is "R-Upper". (Default: Upper right). Date & time will
be displayed as set on the camera. The magnification
is displayed around the camera title during zoom display in wide view.
Camera selection frame
Displays the camera being operated. When using
1-screen/4-screen display (☞ Pages 110 and 111),
the cameras can be operated with the mouse.
98
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Image display area
The number of images that can be displayed on the multiscreen differs for the control screen and the wide view
screen.
Note:
•It is possible to select whether to display or hide the wide view multi-screen selection button. Refer to the
"Set up the main monitor" section (☞ Page 46) for further information.
The startup screen to be displayed upon login in the image display area (default screen) can be set for each
login user.
The available screens that can be set as the default screen are as follows. Refer to page 60 for how to configure the default screen.
Cam.1, ..., Cam.32:
Each camera displayed on a 1-screen
4Screen-(1):
Camera 1 to 4 displayed on a 4-screen
∙∙∙
4Screen-(8):
9Screen-(1):
Camera 29 to 32 displayed on a 4-screen
Camera 1 to 9 displayed on a 9-screen
∙∙∙
9Screen-(4):
16Screen-(1):
16Screen-(2):
Sequence(Wide view):
1screen(Wide view):
4screen(Wide view):
9screen(Wide view):
16screen(Wide view):
24screen(Wide view):
32screen(Wide view):
Camera 28 to 32 displayed on a 9-screen
Camera 1 to 16 displayed on a 16-screen
Camera 17 to 32 displayed on a 16-screen
Live sequence in wide view
1-screen display in wide view
4-screen display in wide view
9-screen display in wide view
16-screen display in wide view
24-screen display in wide view
32-screen display in wide view
Note:
•If any of the default screen other than "Cam.1" - "Cam.32" or "4Screen-(1)" - "4Screen-(8)" is selected, the
4-screen that automatically displays images from camera 1 to camera 4 will become the default screen of
the web browser on the PC.
99
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
About the status display panel
Normal operation
②
③
⑧
In case of alarm/error (When the associated buttons are displayed)
①
②
④
⑤
③
⑥
⑦
① Status display area
Recorder status indications and their details are shown in the table below. In the event that the recorder
enters several statuses at the same time, these are displayed in their order of priority. If both statuses have
the same priority, the one that occurred last will be displayed.
Status
Description
Example
Priority
Live
Live images are being displayed.
6 (Low)
During playback
Recorded images are being played.
6
Mirroring recovery/
RAID recovery
Currently in the process of Mirroring/RAID recovery.
5
Downloading SD data
Indicates that SD memory data is being obtained from
camera.
4
Copying
Data is being copied. Copying progress is displayed in %.
3
Formatting USB
USB medium is being formatted.
3
In the alarm state
Indicates an alarm occurrence. Detailed information of the
alarm will be displayed.
2
Emergency recording
Emergency recording is on.
2
In the error state
Indicates that an error has occurred. A detailed description
of the error content will be displayed.
1
Displaying thumbnail
Thumbnail search screen is being displayed.
0 (High)
② Alarm buttons
Indicate that an alarm has occurred. Turn red in the alarm state. Clicking the buttons will toggle between
displaying/not displaying buttons such as the alarm log button and the alarm reset button.
③ Error button
Indicate that an error has occurred. Turn yellow in the error state. Clicking the buttons will toggle between
displaying/not displaying buttons such as the error log button and the error reset button.
100
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
④ Alarm log display button
The alarm log are displayed on the operation panel of the control screen. Up to 1000 alarm logs are saved.
When more than 1000 logs are filed, the older logs will be overwritten by the newer logs. In this case, the
oldest log is the first to be overwritten.
⑤ Alarm reset button
Cancels the alarm action. If the recording time of emergency recording is set to "Ext.", the emergency recording
will be stopped. Clickable only in the alarm state and emergency recording state.
⑥ Error log display button
The error (trouble) logs are displayed on the operation panel of the control screen. Up to 1000 error logs are
saved. When more than 1000 logs are filed, the older logs will be overwritten by the newer logs. In this
case, the oldest log is the first to be overwritten.
⑦ Error reset button
Cancels the error (trouble) action. Clickable only in the error state.
⑧ Statistical status button
Indicates the status of statistical processing. Refer to the Operating Instructions of the Additional Business
Intelligence Kit (WJ-NXF02, WJ-NXF02W) for the details.
Sub monitor (monitor for display of live images only)
Important:
•Configuration and operation of the recorder from the sub monitor is not possible.
Live images from the specified cameras can be displayed on 1-screen or 4-screen/9-screen/16-screen/24-screen/
32-screen on the sub monitor. When several cameras are selected on 1-screen or 4-screen/9-screen/16-screen,
camera images will be switched sequentially at the selected switching interval (sequence display). In addition,
camera images can be switched according to the signal input triggered by a terminal alarm. (☞ Page 48)
Note:
•The date & time and camera also appear on the camera image displayed on the sub monitor, but some
characters may be cut off.
•To display images, it is necessary to select the cameras to be displayed in the setup menu in advance. The
recorder is not configured to display camera images by default.
•Depending on the selected switching interval, a black screen may appear before camera images are displayed.
•When the secret view function is selected, the single screen on the main monitor or selected images on a
multiscreen will not be displayed.
•While "1-screen live sequence" is being performed, the secret view images will be skipped (not displayed).
•During 9-screen or 16-screen live sequence operation, the black screen is displayed when the camera
image is switched.
•The image of a camera where an error has occurred will not be displayed.
•The size of displayed images will be fit into the screen regardless of the aspect ratio at the default setting.
When the aspect ratio of the sub monitor (BNC) is 4:3, the vertically long images will be displayed compared
with the images of the sub monitor (HDMI).
•Depending on whether enabling or disabling the re-encoding transmission, the frame rate or the resolution
of camera images on the sub monitor may vary, or the sub monitor may momentarily go black.
101
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Basic operations
To operate, use the mouse connected to the recorder to move the mouse cursor displayed on the main monitor
and left-click the buttons or tabs displayed on the screen. (Hereinafter, "Left-click..." will be described as
"Click..." in this document.)
In lines where the [▲]/[▼] buttons are displayed, the value on which the cursor is placed can be changed by
turning the mouse wheel. For example, when setting date & time, the hours, minutes and seconds can be
changed.
The shape of the mouse cursor will change as follows depending on the display screen and mouse operation.
: Normal operation
: When dragging a camera number panel (wide view screen)
Note:
•When no operation is made for 10 seconds or more, the mouse cursor will be hidden. The mouse cursor will
be displayed again when the mouse is moved.
•It is impossible to connect a mouse to the mouse connection port if the connector from the mouse is upside
down. When it is hard to connect, check the upside down position of the connector.
Logout
Click the [Logout] button. To log out, click the [OK] button in the confirmation window displayed.
Note:
•If "On" is selected for the "Auto login" (☞ Page 57), login will be automatically performed by the user registered in "Auto login user" in the logged-out state.
102
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Login operation at startup
When "Off" is selected for "Auto login" (☞ Page 57), the recorder will start up in the logged-out state after
completing the system check.
When the operation window is displayed on the main monitor, enter a user name and password as follows:
Step 1
Click the [Login] button on the operation screen.
→→ The "Login" window will be displayed.
Step 2
Enter a user name and password. For character entry,
refer to "About the operation of on-screen keyboard"
(☞ Installation Guide Page 8).
•Refer to page 59 for how to register users.
Note:
•When "On" is selected for "Quick login", the user
name can be selected from the pull-down menu.
The password entered will be displayed as "*"
marks.
•In the logged-out state or when a user other than
administrative or manager privileges is logged, the
login window will be displayed if tries to operate
an unauthorized function.
Note:
•The administrator is not registered when the
recorder is purchased. Enter an administrator
name, a password and the password retyping following the instruction on the display and click
[Registration] as "Administrator registration"
screen is displayed on the main monitor when you
first launch the recorder.
•To enhance the security, change the administrator
name and the password periodically. Refer to
page 59 for how to change the password.
•To log out, click the [Logout] button on the operation screen.
•When a user logs out during copying, the copying
will be canceled. (When operating the recorder
using a web browser, it will take around 90 seconds until copying is stopped after the web
browser is closed.) When the auto logout function
is activated, logout will be executed when the
specified time have passed after copying is completed.
•Displaying images in the logged-out state
After startup with "Auto login" set to "Off", the
"4Screen-(1)" will be displayed.
When logging out during the login process, the
same screen as right before logout will be displayed.
(Which camera images the user is authorized to
display depends on the user level set up.)
•When "On" is selected for "Auto login", it is
unnecessary to perform the operations described
on this page.
Step 3
Click the [OK] button.
→→ When the entered user name and password are
correct, the login window will disappear and the
login button will change to the logout button.
When the entered user name and password are
incorrect, the error window will be displayed.
Close the error window and log in again.
103
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Monitor live images
When the recorder started up, live images from cameras will be displayed according to the configured settings.
Live images from cameras are displayed via the recorder.
Image data
Network cameras
Main monitor (HDMI)
Recorder
Sub monitor (BNC)
Sub monitor (HDMI)
It is possible to display live images on a 1-screen or on a multiscreen. Depending on the configuration of the
sub monitor, the cameras can automatically be switched and images from the cameras can be displayed on
1-screen or multi-screen. (☞ Page 48)
When displaying images from the camera for which "On" is selected for "Audio" under "Recording setup" (☞
Page 37), audio captured by the camera will be output. When displaying images on a multiscreen, audio from
the selected camera will be heard.
Note:
•Depending on the camera in use or network environment, the audio of live images from the camera may be
delayed, but that may not affect the audio output from recorded images.
•Update processing of audio data will be performed to synchronize live images with audio.
Due to the processing, the audio of live images from the camera may be momentarily interrupted, but that
may not affect the audio output from recorded images.
About the operation panel
Operations with live images differ depending on whether they are performed on the control screen or on the
wide view screen.
Control screen / Operation panel
Camera number tab
Multiscreen buttons
Camera number panel
Digital zoom buttons
Mute button
Fisheye correction display button
104
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Multiscreen buttons
The 1-screen/4-screen/9-screen/16-screen buttons
are displayed.
Note:
•When the camera number tab "1-32" is pressed,
the camera number will not be displayed, but the
camera title and the recording indicator will only
be displayed.
Digital zoom buttons
When displaying images on a 1-screen or 4-screen,
the images can be enlarged/reduced. (☞ Page 112)
Mute button
Each click of this button toggles between mute and
mute cancel of the camera audio.
Fisheye correction display button
Fisheye display button
Returns to the fisheye image display.
1-screen PTZ display button
Corrects the fisheye image and displays on the
1-screen PTZ.
4-screen PTZ display button
Corrects the fisheye image and displays on the
4-screen PTZ.
Only when the camera image is displayed on a 1-screen
in a control screen, will the fisheye correction display
button be displayed.
Camera title: Shows the first 5 characters of the
previously entered camera title.
(Character color)
White: Camera is registered.
Gray: Camera is not registered.
(Background color)
Aqua: Image display area is displaying images
Blue: Camera is registered and image display
area is not displaying images.
Gray: Recording is not possible or camera is
not registered.
Red: Event recording is being performed.
Camera number tab
: Switches the camera number panel to display.
1-16: Displays a panel of Camera 1 ~ 16.
17-32: Displays a panel of Camera 17 ~ 32.
1-32: Displays a panel of Camera 1 ~ 32.
Camera number panel
Camera number:
(Character color)
White: Camera is registered.
Gray: Camera is not registered.
(Background color)
Aqua: Image display area is displaying images
Blue: Camera is registered and image display area is not displaying images.
Gray: Recording is not possible or camera is
not registered.
Camera title: Shows the first 8 characters of the
previously entered camera title.
(Character color)
Same as camera number
(Background color)
Red: Event recording is being performed.
Black: Camera is not registered.
Recording indicator: Lights red when recording is
being performed. Display of [
] indicates a
connection error.
105
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Wide view operation panel
Camera number panel
Multiscreen buttons
Sequence button
Camera number panel
Camera number [CAM]:
(Character color)
White: Camera is registered.
Gray: Camera is not registered.
(Background color)
Aqua: Image display area is displaying
images
Blue: C
amera is registered and image display area is not displaying images.
Gray: Recording is not possible or camera is
not registered.
Red: Event recording is being performed.
Multiscreen buttons
Note:
•It is possible to hide/display the multi-screen
selection buttons on the operation panel. Refer to
the "Configure the settings relating to monitors"
sections (☞ Page 47) for further information.
•When 5 or more multi-screen selection buttons
are displayed, it is possible to switch the position
of displayed buttons using the left/right buttons or
the slider.
Sequence button
: Clicking of a sequence button can start the
sequence. Clicking any multiscreen buttons
other than the sequence button will terminate
the sequence.
106
Note:
•During the sequence, the dragging & dropping of
the camera number panel onto live images can't
switch over camera images.
•During the sequence, the audio is not output.
When fixing the audio output in "Audio output
camera" found in the "Advanced Setup" section
under "Monitor", the audio will be output.
•While recorded images are being played back, the
sequence can't be started.
•Setting "Sequence(Wide view)" on the "Default
screen" under "User Management>User registration" and "User management>Administrator
setup" will start the sequence after login.
•When camera images are displayed in
9-screen/16-screen live sequence (4/9/16-screen
live sequence during 4K output), a black screen is
displayed at the time of the switchover of the
camera images.
•Camera images whose resolutions is set higher
than FHD (1920×1080) or 1.6 M (1280×1280) can
not be displayed in 9-screen/16-screen live
sequence on the main monitor.
Furthermore, camera images whose resolutions is
set higher than 0.4 M (640×640) or SXVGA
(1280×960) can not be displayed when using a
sub monitor.
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Change the camera display position on the screen
The default camera display positions are as follows:
1-screen (16:9)
4-screen (16:9)
1
1
1
1
1
16-screen (16:9)
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
5
9
9
9
9
9
13
13
13
13
13
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
14
14
14
14
14
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
11
11
11
11
11
15
15
15
15
15
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
24-screen (4:3)
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
12
12
12
12
12
16
16
16
16
16
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
7
13
13
13
13
13
19
19
19
19
19
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
8
8
8
8
8
14
14
14
14
14
20
20
20
20
20
1
1
1
1
1
5-screen
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
10
10
10
10
10
16
16
16
16
22
22
22
22
5
5
5
5
5
11
11
11
11
11
17
17
17
17
23
23
23
23
6
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
12
12
18
18
18
18
24
24
24
24
9-screen (4:3)
16-screen (4:3)
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
9
9
9
9
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6-screen
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
13
13
13
13
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
7-screen
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
1
1
1
1
1
16-screen (4:3)
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
14
14
14
14
14
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
5
9
9
9
9
9
13
13
13
13
13
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
15
15
15
15
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
11
11
11
11
11
15
15
15
15
15
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
12
12
12
12
12
16
16
16
16
16
3-screen
4
4
4
4
7
7
7
7
10
10
10
10
10
16
16
16
16
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3-screen
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
14
14
14
14
1
1
1
1
2-screen
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
16
16
24
24
24
24
24
32
32
32
32
32
12-screen (4:3)
4
3 4
2 3
1 2
1
1
4
3 4
2 3
1 2
8
7 8
6 7
5 6
5
5
8
7 8
6 7
5 6
12
11
10
9
12
11
10
9
9
12
11 12
10 11
9 10
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
1-screen (4:3)
1
2 3
3 4
4 5
5 6
6 7
7
1
1
2
1 2
2 3
3 4
4 5
5 6
6 7
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
9 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15
9
17
18 19
19 20
20 21
21 22
22 23
23
17
18
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25 26
26 27
27 28
28 29
29 30
30 31
31
25
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
25
26
27
28
29
30
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
31
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
7
7
7
7
7
32-screen
9-screen (4:3)
3-screen (4:3)
4-screen
3
3
3
3
3
9
9
9
9
9
15
15
15
15
15
21
21
21
21
21
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
9-screen (16:9)
1
1
1
1
1
4-screen (4:3)
1
1
1
1
6-screen (4:3)
3
3
3
3
3
4-screen
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
It is possible to change the camera image by dragging & dropping the number of the camera number panel
onto the desired display position. The position of the camera display can be replaced by the right-click menu
on the image.
107
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Note:
•When a camera is assigned to a screen segment to which another camera is already assigned, the image of
the camera originally assigned to that position will disappear.
•The assigned camera position is retained even if the recorder is rebooted (note however that initializing the
settings will also reset the camera positions to the defaults).
•The audio of the camera assigned to the top left position will be output.
•If "Mute" was selected on the control screen, no audio will be output.
•The size of displayed images will be fit into the screen regardless of the aspect ratio if the aspect ratio of the
original image is 4:3 or 16:9.
•Images may not be displayed in multi-screen depending on the resolution of the connected monitor or compression or the resolution of the registered camera.
【4K monitor connection, H.264/H.265, no sub-monitor display, no re-encoding transmission】
Image capture size
Multiscreen display
HVGAW(640×360) ~
FHD(1920×1080)
QXGA(2048×1536) ~
4KUHD(3840×2160)
9M
(2992×2992)
12M
(4000×3000)
1-screen ~ 4-screen display
○
○
○
○
5-screen/6-screen display
○
○
○
×
7-screen display/4-screen sequence
○
○
×
×
9-screen ~ 16-screen display
○
×
×
×
24-screen ~ 32-screen display
○
○
○
○
【4K/1080p monitor connection, JPEG, no sub-monitor display, no re-encoding transmission】
Image capture size
Multiscreen display
SVGA(800×600) ~
SXVGA(1280×960)
1.6M
(1280×1280)
QXGA(2048×1536) ~
9M(2992×2992)
12M
(4000×3000)
1-screen ~ 4-screen display
○
○
○
○
4-screen sequence,
5-screen ~ 7-screen display
○
○
○
×
9-screen ~ 16-screen display
○
○
×
×
24-screen ~ 32-screen display
○
×
×
×
【4K/1080p monitor connection, JPEG, sub-monitor display or re-encoding transmission】
Image capture size
Multiscreen display
SVGA(800×600) ~
SXVGA(1280×960)
1.6M
(1280×1280)
QXGA(2048×1536) ~
9M(2992×2992)
12M
(4000×3000)
1-screen/2-screen display
○
○
○
○
3-screen/4-screen display
○
○
○
×
4-screen sequence,
5-screen ~ 32-screen display
○
×
×
×
108
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Switch between control screen and wide view screen
Camera images will be displayed on a full screen.
[Wide view] button of the control screen
[Ctrl screen] button of the wide view screen
Step 1
Click the [Wide view] button (☞ Page 97) on the
operation window.
→→ Images from the camera will be displayed on a full
screen. The 1-screen is displayed by default.
Step 2
To return from the full screen to the control screen,
click the [Ctrl screen] button.
→→ The display reverts to the control screen. The
image display area corresponds to the default
screen set up by the login user. When a wide view
screen is set as the default screen, "4Screen-(1)"
will automatically be applied.
109
Note:
•Clicking the [Wide view] button again will switch
to the multiscreen displayed before.
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
1-screen display
Live images from cameras can be displayed on a 1-screen.
Displaying images on a control screen
If a camera that you want to display is not on the
camera number panel, select it on the camera number tab and move to Step 2.
Step 1
When displaying in a multi-screen, click the 1-screen
button of the "Multiscreen select".
→→ The image will be displayed on a 1-screen.
Step 2
Click the camera number panel of the desired image
from the camera.
→→ The background color of the selected camera
number will turn aqua, and live images will be displayed.
Camera No. box in the control screen
Note:
•Another way to display images on a 1-screen is to
double-click the camera number panel of the
camera to be selected in the image display area.
•In the multiscreen display area, double-clicking
the camera selection frame is also possible to display an image on a 1-screen.
•The audio of the camera whose images are being
displayed will be output. (It is possible to fix audio
to be output on "Audio output camera" under
"Advanced setup" under "Monitor".)
•At the default, black zones will be displayed on
the top and bottom of images with the aspect
ratio of 16:9. Refer to page 47 for the setting to
enlarge the vertical size of displayed images.
Displaying images on a wide view
Note:
•The camera can be selected by the right-click
menu on the image display area.
•The audio of the camera whose images are being
displayed will be output. (It is possible to fix audio
to be output on "Audio output camera" under
"Advanced setup" under "Monitor".)
Step 1
When displaying in a multi-screen, click the 1-screen
button of the "Multiscreen select".
→→ The image will be displayed on a 1-screen.
Step 2
Drag the camera No. to be displayed over the live
image and drop it.
→→ The background color of the selected camera
number will turn aqua, and live images will be displayed.
Camera No. box in the wide view screen
110
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Display images from cameras on a multiscreen
Live images from cameras can be displayed on a multiscreen.
Displaying images on a control screen
Step 1
Click one of the [Multiscreen select] buttons.
→→ Live images from cameras will be displayed on a
multi-screen.
Displaying images on a control screen
•4-screen button
Displays images on the 4-screen including the
selected camera. Each click of a button switches
to the next 4 screens in the sequence: camera 1
to 4 → camera 5 to 8 → camera 9 to 12 → camera 13 to 16.
•9-screen button
Displays images on the 9-screen including the
selected camera. Each click of a button switches
to the next 9 screens in the sequence: camera 1
to 9 → camera 10 to 18 → camera 19 to 27.
•16-screen button
Displays images on the 16-screen including the
selected camera. Each click of a button switches
to the next 16 screens in the sequence: camera 1
to 16 → camera 17 to 32 → camera 1 to 16.
Note:
•After having switched from multiscreen to
1-screen display, double-clicking the image display area will display the multiscreen displayed
before switching screens.
•It is also possible to switch the images displayed
on the 4-screen/9-screen/16-screen by clicking
the camera number panel with the 4-screen/9screen/16-screen displayed. (When the panel of
camera 5 is clicked with the 1- to 4-screen displayed, the images of camera 5 to 8 will be displayed)
•The audio of the selected camera will be output.
(It is possible to fix audio to be output on "Audio
output camera" under "Advanced setup" under
"Monitor".)
•At the default, black zones will be displayed on
the top and bottom of images with the aspect
ratio of 16:9. Refer to page 47 for the setting to
enlarge the vertical size of displayed images.
Displaying images on a wide view
Note:
•Cameras displayed on the multiscreen can be
changed. Read Step 2 described in "Displaying
images on a wide view" of "1-screen display".
•Clicking the sequence button can switch camera
images automatically (live sequence display). The
settings related to the live sequence display can
be performed at "Live sequence (Wide view)" of
[Monitor]-[Main monitor].
•The audio of the camera assigned to the top left
position will be output. (It is possible to fix audio
to be output on "Audio output camera" under
"Advanced setup" under "Monitor".)
Step 1
Click one of the [Multiscreen select] buttons.
→→ Live images from cameras will be displayed on a
multiscreen.
[Multiscreen select] button of the wide view screen
111
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Use digital zoom
Images on the 1-screen or 4-screen of the control screen, or the 1-screen in wide view can be digitally zoomed.
It is also possible to move the zoomed area within the displayed image.
Displaying images on a control screen
Note:
•Digital zoom is not available on the 9-screen/16-screen.
•To use this function on the 4-screen, do so after first selecting the desired camera image. To select a camera, click the camera number panel or the camera image. Once a camera has been selected, the selection
frame will be displayed around the camera image.
•If "Enable camera control with mouse" on the
camera control panel (☞ Page 114) is not
checked, the digital zoom factor can also be
changed by placing the cursor on the image in the
image display area and turning the mouse wheel.
In this case, the point where the mouse cursor is
positioned will become the zoom center.
•If the image resolution is too small compared with
the size of the image display area, the digital zoom
levels off and the image cannot be displayed at the
assigned magnification.
Step 1
Confirm that the image display area is displayed on
the 1-screen or 4-screen.
(when displaying on the 4-screen, select the camera
whose image is to be zoomed)
Step 2
.
Click the digital zoom buttons
→→ The displayed image will be enlarged ×1, ×1.25,
×1.50, ×1.75, ×2, ×2.5, ×3, ×3.5, ×4, ×5, ×6, ×7, ×8
centering on the center point of the screen.
Digital zoom buttons
Step 3
to zoom out the
Click the digital zoom button
image by the magnification opposite to the Step 2.
Note:
•Digital zoom is automatically canceled by other
operations such as selecting another camera or
changing the screen pattern.
Note:
•Clicking a point in the zoomed image makes the
clicked point the center of the image.
Displaying images on a wide view
Note:
•The magnification is displayed around the camera
title during the zoom display. If the camera title is
not displayed, the zoom magnification will not be
displayed. You can set whether to display the
camera title in the [Main monitor] tab of the monitor page. (☞ Page 46)
•Digital zoom is automatically canceled by other
operations such as selecting another camera or
changing the screen pattern.
•If the image resolution is too small compared with
the size of the image display area, the digital zoom
levels off and the image cannot be displayed at the
assigned magnification.
Step 1
Confirm that the image display area is set to the
1-screen.
Step 2
Use the mouse wheel.
→→ Zooming is switched by ×0.25 from ×1 to ×2, by
×0.5 from ×2 to ×4 and by ×1 from ×4 to ×8 centering the position of the mouse cursor.
Click of the image during zoom display changes the
center to the clicked position.
112
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Correct the fisheye image
The Fisheye image can be corrected and displayed while the fisheye image is displayed on the 1-screen in the
image display area of the control screen.
Note:
•The fisheye correction display is not available in wide view and on the 4-screen, 9-screen and 16-screen.
The fisheye correction display button is not displayed.
Note:
•Double-click of the right mouse button on the fisheye image can correct the image and display on
the 1-screen PTZ centering the cursor position.
•Click on the image during the 1-screen PTZ correction display can change the center to the
clicked position. Click an image that you want to
change the display position, and then click on the
image during the 4-screen PTZ correction display.
•The clicked position may not come to the center
depending on the clicked position.
•Double-click on the image during the 4-screen PTZ
correction display can switch the screen to the
1-screen PTZ correction display (and vice versa).
•The high resolution image and high frame rate
image may not be corrected and displayed based
on the original frame rate.
Step 1
Confirm that the image display area is set to the 1-screen
display of the fisheye image on the control screen.
Step 2
Click the 1-screen PTZ display/4-screen PTZ display
button.
→→ Corrects the fisheye image and displays on the
1-screen PTZ/4-screen PTZ. Images of the following angle of view will be displayed respectively.
■1-screen PTZ display
Fisheye
After 1-screen correction
■4-screen PTZ display
Fisheye
Step 3
After 4-screen correction
1
2
3
4
Click of the fisheye display button releases the correction function.
1
4
2
Note:
•The correction display position of the fisheye
image is recorded after the recorder is turned off.
•The fisheye image is displayed on the previous
position when it is displayed on the 1-screen after
the recorder is turned on.
•The split line is displayed on the image in a
moment when the correction function is cancelled
from the 4-screen PTZ correction display.
3
Fisheye correction display button
113
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Operate the camera
When displaying live images from a camera with the panning/tilting function on a 1-screen or 4-screen, the following camera operations are available.
Note:
•It may be impossible to operate the camera or some functions may be inoperable depending on the model
of the camera.
•Operations are performed from the operation window. When working with the wide view screen, open a
1-screen or 4-screen operation window by clicking the [Ctrl screen] button in the bottom right corner of the
screen.
•For a fixed camera, the buttons on the camera control panel and other controls will be disabled.
Camera control panel
Operate the cameras displayed as selected (inside selection frame) in the image display area. On the 1-screen,
the camera whose image is currently displayed, can be operated. On the 4-screen, click the camera number
panel on the operation panel, or select a camera image by clicking it in the image display area.
Control buttons
Control buttons
Move (pan/tilt) the camera in the clicked direction.
Keeping the button pressed will move the camera
continuously.
[Detail] button
Display the "Camera control [Advanced]" panel, and
perform any of the following camera operations.
[Zoom] button
Adjusts the zoom factor.
[Home position/Call] button
Move the camera to the home position.
[Enable camera control with mouse] checkbox
When this item is checked, pan/tilt (clicking) and
zoom (mouse wheel) can be controlled with the
mouse on the selected camera image.
Note:
•When this checkbox is marked, digital zooming
(☞ Page 112) by turning the mouse wheel operation is not possible. When the camera control
panel is inoperable for the fixed camera, the digital zoom can be performed by turning the mouse
wheel.
[Focus] button
Adjust the focal point.
[Brightness] button
Adjusts the lens iris of the camera.
Auto mode
Activates the auto mode function of the camera.
114
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
[Position]
Registers the current orientation of the camera as a
preset position. Moves the camera to a previously
registered preset position.
[Back] button
Closes the "Camera control [Advanced]" and returns
to the camera control panel.
Note:
•Controlling the cameras is not possible on the
wide view screen and on the 9-screen/16-screen.
When the page is switched to 2/2 with a button on the
top right of the detailed control panel, the following
camera operation can be performed.
[AUX] button
Sets the device connected to the AUX terminal of the
camera to the open/closed state.
If the camera is a network camera, AUX1, 2 and 3 is
controlled with only AUX1 of the camera.
If the device is the encoder GXE500, the AUX1 and 2
control terminals of a camera or a receiver (WVRC150) are applicable for each analogue camera
connected to it.
The AUX3 controls the AUX output terminal (1 system
only) of GXE500.
[Wiper] button
Operates the washer/wiper of the WV-SUD638.
[Setup] button
Displays the camera setup window for registering a
home position (☞ Page 121), executing auto back
focus (☞ Page 121), etc.
115
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Panning/Tilting
Adjusts the horizontal/vertical position of the camera.
Step 1
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Note:
•To enable operations in the displayed camera
image from the recorder, check "Enable camera
control with mouse" on the camera control panel.
Step 2
Click the [Control] button.
Click the desired point to be located at the center of
the angular field of view. The camera will move to
locate the clicked point as the center point in the
image display area.
Zooming
Zoom the displayed camera image in/out by zooming the camera lens. Depending on the models of the connected cameras, the available zooming factors may be different. Refer to the operating instructions of the camera for further information.
Step 1
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Step 2
Click the [–] button or the [+] button.
Alternatively, adjust the zoom by placing the mouse
pointer on the image and turning the mouse wheel.
Click the [x1] button to reset the zoom factor to x1.
116
Note:
•To enable operations in the displayed camera
image from the recorder, check "Enable camera
control with mouse" on the camera control panel.
•When selecting an area in the image display area
by dragging the mouse, the selected area will be
located at the center of the image display area
and the zoom ratio will be adjusted automatically.
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Move to home position
Move the camera to a previously registered home position. The home position needs to be registered in
advance. (☞ Page 121)
Step 1
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Step 2
Click the [Call] button to move to the home position.
Focus adjustment
Adjusts the focal point. The auto focus function is available.
Step 1
Step 3
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Click the [Near] or [Far] button.
When the [Auto] button is clicked, focus will automatically be adjusted.
Step 2
Click the [Detail] button.
→→ The "Camera control [Advanced]" panel will be
displayed. (☞ Page 114)
Iris (brightness) adjustment
Adjusts the lens iris of the camera.
Step 1
Step 3
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Click the [–] or [+] button.
It is possible to reset the set brightness by clicking
the [Reset] button.
Step 2
Click the [Detail] button.
→→ The "Camera control [Advanced]" panel will be
displayed. (☞ Page 114)
117
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Auto mode
Activates the auto mode function of the camera.
Step 1
Step 4
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Step 2
Click the [Start] button to start the selected auto
mode function.
Click the [Stop] button to turn off the auto mode function.
Click the [Detail] button.
→→ The "Camera control [Advanced]" panel will be
displayed. (☞ Page 114)
Note:
•When you use the auto mode, please read the
operating instructions of your camera and set the
auto mode at the camera menu in advance.
Step 3
Click the auto mode button [▼] of the camera, and
select one of the following auto modes:
Auto track: The camera will automatically track an
object moving on the screen.
Auto pan: The camera direction will automatically
move (pan) between the start point and end
point set in advance.
Preset sequence: The camera will move to the
preset positions registered in advance in order
of the preset position number (numerical
order).
Patrol: The camera will trace the manually
recorded panning pattern.
118
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Register camera preset positions
Register the current camera position as a preset position. The preset positions can be registered only when
using a camera supporting the preset position function.
Step 1
Step 4
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Click the [▲]/[▼] button in the [Position] box to select
a preset number. Select a preset number (1 - 256) to
be registered.
Step 2
Step 5
Click the [Detail] button.
→→ The "Camera control [Advanced]" panel will be
displayed. (☞ Page 114)
Click the [Regist] button.
→→ The camera direction will be registered to the
selected preset position number when you click
the [OK] button on the confirmation window.
Step 3
Move the direction of the camera to the position to be
registered using the panning/tilting function of the
camera. (☞ Page 116)
Move camera preset positions
Move the camera to the registered preset position. It is necessary to register preset positions in advance.
Step 1
Step 4
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Step 2
Click the [Call] button.
→→ The camera direction will move to the preset position corresponding to the selected preset position
number.
Click the [Detail] button.
→→ The "Camera control [Advanced]" panel will be
displayed. (☞ Page 114)
Note:
•A non-registered preset number can be selected,
but the camera will not move even if the [Call] button is clicked.
Step 3
Click the [▲]/[▼] button in the [Position] box to select
a preset number. Select a preset number (0 - 256) to
be registered. Selecting preset position number 0 will
move the camera to home position.
119
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
AUX operation
Sets the device connected to the AUX terminal of the camera to the open/closed state.
Step 1
Step 4
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Step 2
Click the [Detail] button.
→→ The "Camera control [Advanced]" panel will be
displayed. (☞ Page 114)
Click the [Open]/[Close] button after selecting the
AUX terminal number.
When [Open] button is clicked, the AUX terminal of
the camera becomes open.
When [Close] button is clicked, the AUX terminal of
the camera becomes closed.
Note:
•The selection of the AUX terminal number is only
available for WJ-GXE500. For cameras other than
WJ-GXE500, the open/close operations only are
available.
Step 3
Click the page switch button on the right top of the
screen.
→→ The page will be switched to 2/2.
Wiper operation
Operates the washer/wiper.
Step 1
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
When [Start] button is clicked, the selected motion
starts.
When [Stop] button is clicked, the motion ends.
Note:
•The following operation is not available while the
washer is operating.
• [Start] and [Stop] operation of "Wiper"
• Control of panning, tilting zooming and focusing
• [Start] operation of "Auto mode"
• [Call] operation of "Preset Position"
•It requires the washer operation settings for the
camera side. Refer to the operating instruction of
WV-SUD638.
Step 2
Click the [Detail] button.
→→ The "Camera control [Advanced]" panel will be
displayed. (☞ Page 114)
Step 3
Click the page switch button on the right top of the
screen.
→→ The page will be switched to 2/2.
Step 4
Select an operation and click the [Start] or [Stop] button.
High: Wipes out continuously. (once per 4 seconds)
Low: Wipes out continuously. (once per 8 seconds)
1 shot: Performs high speed wiping (once per 4
seconds) 5 times.
Washer: Performs the specified washer/wiper
operation.
Refer to the operating instruction of WV-SUD638.
120
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Register home position
The home position is set with the camera positioned at an already registered preset position.
Step 1
Step 4
Register the camera preset positions on the "Camera
control [Advanced]" panel. (☞ Page 119)
Step 2
Click the [Setup] button.
→→ The camera setup window will be displayed.
(☞ Page 115)
Click the [Regist] button.
→→ The selected preset number will be registered as
the home position when you click the [OK] button
on the confirmation window.
Step 5
Click the [Back] button.
→→ The camera setup window closes, and the display
returns to the "Camera control [Advanced]" panel.
Step 3
Click the [▲]/[▼] button in the [Position] box to select
a preset number to register as the home position.
Select a preset number (1 - 256) to be registered.
Note:
•On some Panasonic camera models, preset position number 0 is registered as home position.
Refer to the "readme.txt" on the provided
CD-ROM about the supported cameras.
Execute auto back focus
The auto back focus function starts to automatically adjust back focus based on a subject located in the center
of the screen by clicking the execute button. For further information about this function, refer to the operating
instructions of the camera in use.
Step 1
Step 3
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Click the [Execute] button next to "Auto back focus".
Step 4
Step 2
Display the "Camera control [Advanced]" panel
(☞ Page 114), and click the [Setup] button.
→→ The camera setup window (☞ Page 115) will be
displayed.
Click the [Back] button.
→→ The camera setup window closes, and the display
returns to the "Camera control [Advanced]" panel.
121
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Set up mask areas
Set up mask areas of the camera. For further information about this function, refer to the operating instructions
of the camera in use.
Step 1
Step 5
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Click the [End] button.
→→ The mask area setting will be completed and the
grid will disappear.
Step 2
Step 6
Display the "Camera control [Advanced]" panel
(☞ Page 114), and click the [Setup] button.
→→ The camera setup window (☞ Page 115) will be
displayed.
Click the [Back] button.
→→ The camera setup window closes, and the display
returns to the "Camera control [Advanced]" panel.
Step 3
Click the [Start] button.
→→ A grid will appear over the image display area and
the segments designated as mask areas are covered with white translucent masks.
Note:
•It is possible to reset all the mask area settings by
clicking the [Reset] button.
Step 4
Click a segment in the image display area.
→→ Each click of the segment toggles between On
and Off for the mask area setting.
Zoom/Focus adjustment
Adjust zooming or focusing of the camera. For further information about this function, refer to the operating
instructions of the camera in use.
Step 1
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Step 2
Display the "Camera control [Advanced]" panel
(☞ Page 114), and click the [Setup] button.
→→ The camera setup window (☞ Page 115) will be
displayed.
Step 3
Click the [Setup] button.
→→ The zoom/focus adjustment screen will be displayed.
122
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Step 4
Step 5
Zooming can be adjusted by clicking the [–] button,
the [×1] button or the [+] button.
Focusing can be adjusted by clicking the [Near] button, the [Reset] button or the [Far] button.
Click the [Back] button.
→→ The screen will return to the camera setting page.
Initial position setup
Tilting degree adjustment, vertical angle adjustment, horizontal adjustment of image clipping position can be
performed. For further information about this function, refer to the operating instructions of the camera in use.
Step 1
Step 5
When displaying the images on a 4-screen, select the
desired cameras.
Click the [Set] button.
→→ The adjusted position will be saved on the camera.
Step 2
Step 6
Display the "Camera control [Advanced]" panel
(☞ Page 114), and click the [Setup] button.
→→ The camera setup window (☞ Page 115) will be
displayed.
Click the [Back] button.
→→ The screen will return to the camera setting page.
Step 3
Click the [Setup] button.
→→ The initial position setup window will be displayed.
Step 4
Adjust the position using the buttons or by clicking on
the image.
123
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Event function
The recorder will take an event action when any of the following events occur.
•Terminal alarm:An event when an alarm input signal is supplied from an external device such as a
door sensor to the alarm input terminal on the rear of the recorder.
•Camera site alarm:
An event when an alarm (camera terminal alarm, etc.) is detected by a camera.
•Command alarm:
An alarm when receiving an alarm from a PC, etc. via a network.
Action to be taken upon an event occurrence
When the recorder recognizes an event, it will take an event action according to the set action mode.
Event action mode
In the event modes shown below, the recorder takes one of the following event actions when an event occurs.
The event action mode can be configured on the setup menu. (☞ Page 41)
Recording & alarm action:Performs all event actions according to the settings. ("A" in the following table)
Recording only:Performs only recording, filing alarm logs, and moving to camera presets. ("B" in the
following table)
Off:
Files only alarm logs. ("C" in the following table)
A different event action will be taken depending on the selected event action mode. Refer to a system administrator for further information.
Event action
Mode*1
Description
A
B
C
Recording
Start event recording
Recording will start according to the recording
duration configured on the setup menu.
●
●
×
Define pre-event recording
Camera images recorded before an event occurs can
be associated with the event and saved on the hard
disk.
●
●
×
Move the camera to the
preset position
Move the camera to the preset position registered in
advance.
●
●
×
Blink the alarm indicator
The alarm indicator on the front panel will start
blinking.
○
×
×
Sound the buzzer
The buzzer will start sounding for the duration set in
advance.
●
×
×
Outputs alarm signals
Output signals will be sent from the ALARM/
CONTROL connector at the rear of the recorder.
●
×
×
Display event information on
the main monitor
The event type and terminal/camera number will be
displayed on the status display panel. At the same
time, the alarm button turn red.
○
×
×
Display the alarm icon on a
web browser
The alarm icon will be displayed on the event error
display area of the web browser.
○
○
×
Display the alarm message
on a web browser
A window that notifies of an event occurrence will be
displayed on the web browser.
* The alarm message displayed last has priority. To
close the window, click the [×] button.
●
×
×
Record the alarm logs*2
Date & time of the event and event information will be
recorded in a log list.
●
●
●
Alarm action
124
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Event action
Mode*1
Description
A
B
C
Alarm action
Send a mail that notifies of
an event occurrence
An e-mail notifying of the event and its date & time
(alarm mail) will be sent to registered e-mail
addresses (up to 4). (☞ Page 37, 54)
●
×
×
Provide an alarm notification
to a PC according to the
Panasonic alarm protocol
setting
When an event occurs, a notification will be sent to a
PC in accordance with the settings made under
[Panasonic alarm protocol]. (☞ Page 37, 55)
●
×
×
Display the images on a
1-screen when an alarm
occurs
Display the images recorded by the camera
associated with the alarm number on a 1-screen
●
×
×
*1 ○: Takes action regardless of the setting, ●: takes action in accordance with the setting, ×: takes no action
*2 When "On" is selected for the "Additional alarm data" setting of the camera, i-VMD type information will be
displayed in the alarm log. For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the camera in use.
Stop buzzer beeping
The buzzer sounding to announce an alarm or error can be stopped from the recorder’s front panel.
Step 1
Press the [BUZZER STOP] button.
→→ The buzzer will stop.
Note:
•The buzzer can also be stopped by canceling the alarm action or error action. (☞ Page 126) The [BUZZER
STOP] button does not reset any of the other alarm actions.
125
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Cancel the alarm action
The recorder will take an alarm action according to the settings configured in advance when an event occurs in
the alarm mode (ALM). Information of the occurred alarm will be displayed on the status display panel of the
main monitor. (☞ Page 100) To reset the alarm action, click the [Alarm] button on the status display panel, and
click the alarm [Reset] button.
When an item other than "Ext." is selected for "Auto reset time" on the "Event setup" tab under "REC & event"
on the setup menu [Basic setup] (☞ Page 39), the following actions will automatically be taken even if the
alarm action is not canceled by clicking the alarm [Reset] button.
•The alarm indicator on the front panel will stop blinking and light steadily.
•The alarm status display on the main monitor will disappear.
•The sounding buzzer and the alarm output will stop.
Note:
•When the alarm action is canceled, the event
recording will stop and return to the operational
status just before the event occurred.
Step 1
Click the [Alarm] button displayed on the main monitor, and click the alarm [Reset] button.
→→ The alarm action will be canceled and the alarm
indicator will go off.
Cancel the error action
When an error (trouble) occurred on the recorder, the recorder will take the error action (a series of actions that
notifies of the error occurrence). Information of the occurred error will be displayed on the status display panel
of the main monitor. (☞ Page 100) To cancel an error action, first click the [Error] button on the status display
panel and then the displayed error [Reset] button.
Note:
•When an error occurs, take remedial action by following the instructions displayed on the error log panel
(☞ Page 138). The error indicator on the front of the recorder will keep blinking till the cause of the error is
eliminated.
•When the cause of the error is resolved automatically, the following operations are performed automatically.
• The error indicator on the front panel will stop blinking and light steadily.
• The error status display on the main monitor will disappear.
• The sounding buzzer and error output will stop.
•Clicking the error reset button turns off the error button and error indicator.
126
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Record images
Live images can be recorded on the recorder. The image of up to 32 cameras can be recorded in the recorder.
Network cameras
Image data
HDD
Recorder
Record images (Schedule recording)
Recording can be automatically started and stopped according to a previously specified schedule. Refer to
page 35 for schedule recording.
Note:
•When event recording is triggered by an alarm during the schedule recording, event recording has the
higher priority. Refer to the "Recording mode and its priority" section below for further information about the
priority of the recording mode.
•To stop schedule recording, stop the recording on the setup menu. Refer to page 43 for further information.
•In case of a network error, the image of the camera where the communication error has occurred will not be
recorded. Recording starts when the network error is recovered. If the status in which the communication
with the camera is disconnected recovers within around 40 seconds, it may not be recorded in the error log.
•Schedule-recorded image data will be divided into multiple files every hour on the hour. In that moment,
recording may sometimes be interrupted around for 1 second.
Recording mode and its priority
There are 4 recording modes. The recording modes and their priority levels are as follows.
When two or more recordings with different recording modes started simultaneously, only recording with the
higher priority will start.
Recording mode
Priority
Emergency recording
1
Event recording
2
Schedule recording
3
Pre-event recording
4
Audio
The audio recording is done at the same time as the image recording. The audio recording can be set for each
camera. Refer to page 37 for further information.
Note:
•The audio recording is done at the same time as the image recording. Recording of the audio only is not
available.
127
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Emergency recording
The recording is manually done using a switch connected to the "Emergency recording input" terminal of the
"ALARM/CONTROL connector" on the back side of the recorder when the emergency occurs. For example,
you can install a switch into the reception of the store and press the switch for the emergency recording when a
suspicious person appears.
Important:
•The emergency recording records all images of all the connected cameras.
Step 1
Press the switch connected to the "Emergency
recording input" terminal.
→→ The emergency recording will start.
Step 2
The emergency recording will automatically be terminated when the recording time set for the emergency
recording is over.
Set the recording time of emergency recording at
"Recording time of emergency recording" of "REC &
event" - "Advanced setup" tab on the setting menu.
Note:
•The emergency recording is the most prioritized
recording mode. The emergency recording will be
prioritized even if recording is being done on
another recording mode.
•Press the "Alarm reset" button to stop the recording if "Recording time of emergency recording"
setting (☞ Page 43) is "Ext."
128
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Play recorded images
Display the images recorded on the recorder’s hard disk on the main monitor.
Playback operation can be made while recording. Playback of images can be controlled from the operation display area or the wide view.
Refer to page 134 and following pages for playback operation.
Image data
Main monitor
HDD
Recorder
Note:
•Images can be played on 1-screen and 4-screen in the control screen. When the sub-stream recording is
set, the image can be played on 9-screen and 16-screen also (Except cameras which record images as
JPEG).
•Images can be played back on 1-screen to 4-screen in the wide view. When the sub-stream recording is
set, images can be played on up to 16-screen (Except cameras which record images as JPEG).
•The audio of the displayed image is output on 1-screen display and the audio of the selected camera is output on multi-screen display of the control screen.
•The audio of the top-left camera on the screen is output during the wide view.
•No audio will be output when playing back in fast forward/fast reverse.
•The camera image can be changed by clicking the camera number (1 to 32) during playback.
•The Multiscreen select button, digital zoom button, Mute button and OSD button remain effective during
playback. Refer to "Monitor live images" (☞ Page 104) for further information.
•When displaying images recorded at the following setting values of resolution and frame rate on each segment of a multiscreen, the images will be played back with the selected refresh interval.
【No sub-monitor display nor re-encoding transmission】
Display
Resolution
3-screen/4-screen
HD(1280×720)
FHD(1920×1080)
50 ips or higher
12M(4000×3000)
15 ips
【Sub monitor display or re-encoding transmission enabled】
Display
Resolution
HD(1280×720)
FHD(1920×1080)
QXGA(2048×1536) ~ 9M(2992×2992)
12M(4000×3000)
3-screen/4-screen
50 ips or higher
25 ips or higher
10 ips or higher (H.264/H.265)
Display not available (MJPEG)
129
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
【Sub monitor display and re-encoding transmission enabled】
Display
1-screen
3-screen/4-screen
FHD(1920×1080)
HD(1280×720)
(Not applicable)
50 ips or higher
QXGA(2048×1536)
(Not applicable)
25 ips or higher
WQHD(2560×1440) ~ 9M(2992×2992)
(Not applicable)
10 ips or higher
10 ips or higher
3 ips or higher (H.264/H.265)
Display not available (MJPEG)
Resolution
12M(4000×3000)
•Different values selected for resolution and frame rate will cause the data size of the playback images on the
multiscreen to differ considerably, which may result in non-synchronized playback. In this case, pause and
then restart playback (☞ Page 131).
•At the default, black zones will be displayed on the top and bottom of images with the aspect ratio of 16:9
when images are played back on the control screen. Refer to page 47 for the setting to enlarge the vertical size of displayed images.
•Image with an aspect ratio of 16:9 is displayed fitting into the screen when the image is played in wide view.
130
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Playback operation panel
In playback mode, operation buttons are displayed on the playback operation panel. In addition to the operation buttons, the playback operation panel displays the playback status.
Normal status (during display of live images)
Image playback status
Playback pause status
Wide view playback status (Image playback status)
Wide view playback status (Playback pause status)
Wide view playback status (Minimized mode, image playback status)
Wide view playback status (Minimized mode, playback pause status)
Click the minimizing button
on the playback operation panel in the wide view playback status to minimize
the window.
The functions of the buttons are as follows:
Function
Example
Operation
Playback button
Plays recorded images.
Clicking this button while playback is paused will cancel the pause
status.
When the playback button is clicked during fast playback/fast
reverse playback, the playback speed will be x1.
Stop button
Playback will stop and live images will be displayed when this button is clicked during playback/pause.
Pause button
Playback will be paused when this button is clicked during playback.
Pause will be canceled when this button is clicked during playback/pause.
Captured image button
Saves images paused during playback on USB medium.*
Clickable only while playback is paused on a 1-screen. When this
button is clicked, the button will turn gray, and images will be
saved. The USB medium can be removed when the button
becomes available.
The image size of the captured image is not the resolution of the
recording, but that of the playback.
131
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Function
Next image/Previous
image button
Example
Operation
When the next image button is clicked during pausing, the next
frame is played and paused.
When the previous image button is clicked during a pause, the
previous frame is played and paused.
Note:
•When playing H.264/H.265 images, some frames of recorded
images will not be displayed. Reverse frame-by-frame playback
will be performed with the refresh interval setting of the camera.
Fast forward/Fast
reverse button
Playback speed of fast playback will be changed in the following
order each time the fast forward button is clicked:
Step2 (Approx. 2x) → Step3 (Approx. 4x) → Step4 (Approx. 8x) →
Step5 (Approx. 16x) → Step6 (Approx. 32x) → Step7 (Approx. 48x)
Playback speed of fast reverse playback will be changed in the
following order each time the fast reverse button is clicked:
Step2 (Approx. 2x) → Step3 (Approx. 4x) → Step4 (Approx. 8x) →
Step5 (Approx. 16x) → Step6 (Approx. 32x) → Step7 (Approx. 48x)
The playback speed will be displayed on the playback status display.
Note:
•When playing H.264/H.265 images, some frames of recorded
images will not be displayed. Except for ×2 fast playback
speed, fast playback/fast reverse playback will be performed
with the refresh interval setting of the camera.
Next record/Previous
record button
Clicking the next record button will play back the next later
recording.
Clicking the previous record button will play back the next earlier
recording.
When there is no next/previous recorded image to be skipped to,
the current playback will continue.
Go to last button
When this button is clicked, playback of the latest recorded
images will start. The starting point is around 10 seconds before
the date & time of the latest recorded images.
Playback status display
The status of the recorder such as the playback status, pause status etc. will be displayed.
The playback speed will be displayed in fast forward/fast reverse
mode.
Wide view button/
Ctrl screen button
Clicking the button during playback stops the playback and displays the live image in the wide view/control screen.
Playback operation
panel switch button
(Displayed during
playback on a full
screen)
The playback operation panel will be hidden when the playback
operation panel is displayed. Clicking the button again will return
to the original display.
Clicking the button during the live image display will start playback
and displays the playback operation panel.
132
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
About captured images
The images captured by clicking the image capture button and saved on a USB medium will not be displayed
with this recorder.
To display those images on a PC monitor, the data format and destination to save are as follows:
File format for recorded images: JPEG (DPOF-compatible)
Destination to save:
USB storage
DCIM\100_PANA\P1000001.jpg
P1000002.jpg, ...
* The folder will be created from 100_PANA to 999_PANA. If the folder already contains the file
P1000999.jpg, a folder with a new number will be created.
133
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Play images from a designated point
It is possible to start playback from a designated date & time or the latest recorded image.
Play image recorded at a designated date & time
Start playback by designating the date & time of a recorded image on the date & time operation panel.
Date & time operation panel (normal display)
Playback button
Calendar
Step 1
Step 4
Click the [▲]/[▼] button in the [Playback] box to set
the date & time to be played.
To stop playback and return to live images, click the
[Live] button or the stop button on the playback operation panel.
→→ Playback will stop, and live images will be displayed.
Step 2
Select the month from the calendar in which date &
time of the image to play back is included.
Click the [<<Y]/[Y>>] button to change the year and
the [<M]/[M>] button to change the month.
Note:
•The current date is displayed in aqua.
•The date on which the recorded image is stored
on the HDD will be displayed in white.
Step 3
Click the date & time of the image to play back from
the calendar.
→→ The background of the selected date turns green,
and playback starts at the designated date &
time.
The date & time operation panel will turn to the
playback display (☞ Page 136) and the playback
operation panel will be displayed on lower section
of the date & time operation panel (☞ Page 131).
Note:
•Unless you want to change the date & time on the
calendar, click the playback button.
134
Note:
•Playback can also be stopped and live images
can also be displayed by the following operations:
• Clicking the [Live] button or [×] button on the
date & time operation panel (playback display)
• Changing the playback medium
•When there is no image stored under the entered
date & time, proceed as follows:
• When there are images recorded after the designated date & time, the oldest image recorded
after the designated date & time will be played.
• When there are no images recorded after the
designated date & time, the newest image
recorded before the designated date & time
will be played.
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Play the latest recorded image
When this button is clicked, playback of the latest recorded images will start. The starting point is around 10
seconds before the date & time of the latest recorded images.
Date & time operation panel (normal display)
Operation panel (Wide view display)
Step 1
Click the [Go to last] button.
→→ Playback of the latest recorded images will start.
The date & time operation panel will change to
playback display (☞ Page 136). At the same
time, the playback operation panel (☞ Page 131)
is displayed at the bottom of the date & time
operation panel.
Step 2
To stop playback and return to live images, click the
[Live] button or the stop button on the playback operation panel.
→→ Playback will stop, and live images will be displayed.
Note:
•Playback can also be stopped and live images
can also be displayed by the following operations:
• Clicking the [×] button on the date & time
operation panel (playback display)
• Changing the playback medium
•When clicking the [Go to last] button while displaying images on a 4-screen, the recorded image
may not be displayed depending on the timing. In
this case, click the [Go to last] button again.
•The playback cannot start during the live
sequence display in wide view. Click the [Go to
last] button after switching the screen to those
other than the live sequence display.
135
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Playback by designating a timeline
When playback starts, the date & time operation panel will change to playback display.
This section explains how to use the timeline display to designate a playback date & time by operating the playback slider.
Date & time operation panel (playback display)
Scale selection button
Jump buttons
Jump interval
Display range selection
button
Display range selection
button
Playback slider
Timeline
The playback display shows available recorded images and displays these on a timeline sorted by type. It is
possible to change the type of recorded images displayed on the timeline, change the timeline scale, and designate the recorded image to play.
[REC Event]
Mark the checkboxes of different types of recorded
images and display them on a timeline. If changes are
made during playback, playback will be paused and a
new search will be performed.
Schedule: Schedule-recorded images will be displayed in pink
Event: Event-recorded images will be displayed in red
[Time-saving playback]
When it is checked, the recorded image is automatically played up to 4 times faster if there is no movement in the image. Remove the check mark if you
want to play the image at normal speed.
If you activate the time-saving playback (☞ Page 47),
the screen is displayed with the box always checked.
[Information]
When this box is checked, the time zone recorded
when the VMD function was activated (motion was
detected in an image) will be displayed in blue on the
timeline. (Playback will be paused.)
Periods for which no recorded images are available
will be displayed in black.
Note:
•To display the result of the motion detection
search, cameras that support the motion detection search function are necessary.
Refer to the "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM
about the supported cameras. Refer to the operating
instructions of the camera in use for further information.
136
Note:
•To use the time-saving playback, cameras that
support the motion detection search function are
necessary.
Refer to the "readme.txt" on the provided
CD-ROM about the supported cameras. Refer to
the operating instructions of the camera in use for
further information.
(If the setting for "VMD information addition" is off,
or the image recorded by Panasonic cameras
does not support time-saving playback, the image
will be played in the fast playback mode regardless of motion.)
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
•The time-saving playback only functions when the
image is played back at the actual size on
1-screen ~ 4-screen. It does not function while
fisheye correction is displayed.
•When the time-saving playback functions in the
fast playback mode,
is displayed. During
this time, no audio is output.
•When an image is played with a recorded time
close to the current time, fast playback is not
available.
•When the image capture size and the frame rate
of the recorded image are high, the fast playback
may not be available. In addition, the playback
speed of each image may not be the same during
multiscreen playback depending on the setting
values of the image capture size and the frame
rate of each recorded image.
[Advanced setup] button
Display the advanced setup panel and change event
types and other information displayed on the timeline.
Playback will be paused.
[Scale selection] button
Select a timeline display covering 2 hours (2 h), 8
hours (8 h) or 24 hours (24 h).
[Display range selection] button
The timeline will be displayed in accordance with the
setting of the scale selection button.
[Playback slider]
Displays the time during playback. Drag and drop the
playback slider to a desired time on the timeline to
start playback from that time.
Note:
•The playback slider may not soon move to the
desired position.
[Jump interval]/[Jump] buttons
Move the playback point by a given amount of time
and play back from that point. Clicking the [<] / [>]
buttons will move the playback point by the amount
of time specified under [Jump interval].
Available ranges: 10 s/ 15 s/ 30 s/ 60 s/ 180 s/ 300 s
[Playback of audio]
This item is displayed when the recorder is set up to
lock in a camera with audio output. If this checkbox is
marked, the audio associated with the displayed
image will be output. (☞ Page 49)
Change event types and other information displayed on the timeline
[Advanced setup]
[Event type]
Set event types to be displayed on the timeline. To
display event-recorded images on a timeline, mark
their checkboxes.
Refer to page 124 for further information about each
alarm.
[Sensitivity of VMD]
Set the sensitivity for the motion detection displayed
on the timeline. Sensitivity increases in the steps
shown below.
Low → Mid → High → All
[Back] button/[×] button
Click this button to return to the date & time operation
panel (playback display).
137
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Search and play
Search a desired recorded image and play it. There are the following 3 searching methods.
•Play images selected from alarm and error logs (Log search)
•Display thumbnail screen and paly back (Thumbnail search)
•Search and play images recorded triggered by the motion detection of the camera (VMD search)
Play images selected from logs (Log search)
Display the alarm log list or error log list, and click a date & time to play the corresponding recorded images.
Note:
•The corresponding recorded data that is displayed in the selected log list cannot be played if the data has
already been overwritten or erased.
Step 1
Click the [Alarm] button or [Error] button on the status
display panel.
→→ The corresponding [Log] buttons will be displayed.
Step 2
Click the [Log] button.
→→ The alarm log panel or error log panel will be displayed. It is possible to switch between list pages
by clicking the [Previous]/[Next] buttons.
Note:
•Up to 1000 error logs are saved. When more than
1000 logs are filed, the older logs will be overwritten by the newer logs. In this case, the oldest log
is the first to be overwritten.
Step 3
Select the line with the desired list, and click the playback button on the playback operation panel.
(☞ Page 131)
→→ Playback will start from a point approx. 5 seconds
before the date & time selected.
Note:
•Up to 1000 alarm logs are saved. When more than
1000 logs are filed, the older logs will be overwritten by the newer logs. In this case, the oldest log
is the first to be overwritten.
138
Note:
•Playback can also be started by double-clicking
the desired date & time line.
•To start playback from the beginning of the preevent recording when the "Pre-event duration" setting is longer than 5 seconds, click the playback
button, and then click the previous record button.
•If no recorded image is available for 5 seconds
from the date & time, image will be played from
the date & time.
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Step 4
To stop playback and return to live images, click the
stop button on the playback operation panel.
(☞ Page 131)
→→ Playback will stop, and live images will be displayed.
Display thumbnail screen and paly back (Thumbnail search)
Search a thumbnail from the recorded images and play back.
Select an image from the thumbnail screen and play back the image.
Step 1
Step 5
Click the "Search" button of the playback operation
panel.
→→ The thumbnail search screen will be displayed.
Click the [Search] button.
→→ Searches thumbnails at every display interval
from the assigned starting date and time and displays them on the image display area.
Up to 12 thumbnails can be displayed. The [Previous]/[Next] buttons can switch thumbnails.
Step 2
Select a camera that you want to search on the camera number panel.
Step 3
Designate a date and time for the start date and time
(Start).
Set the "Start" using the [▲]/[▼] buttons of the date
and time.
Step 4
Assign the display interval of thumbnails. Displays
thumbnails in accordance with the display interval by
searching them from the recorded images.
Display interval: 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h
139
Note:
•It may take time to display all thumbnails.
•The date and time display until thumbnails are displayed is a provisional date and time calculated
from the starting date and time and the display
interval.
Once thumbnails are displayed, the date and time
will be updated to the actual date and time of the
thumbnails.
•If the recorded image is not found at the assigned
date and time, the thumbnail after the assigned
date and time will be displayed.
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Step 6
Step 7
Click a thumbnail that you want to play and then click
the playback button on the playback operation panel.
→→ Starts playback from the date and time of the
selected thumbnail.
To stop playback and return to live images, click the
stop button on the playback operation panel.
(☞ Page 131)
→→ Playback will stop, and live images will be displayed.
Note:
•You can start the playback by double-clicking a
thumbnail that you want to play back.
Search and play recorded images triggered by motion
detection (VMD search)
Search images recorded with a camera supporting the VMD search function by the date motion was detected
and play them. Click a date & time on the result list to play corresponding recorded images.
Important:
•To perform the motion detection search, it is necessary to configure the settings of the connected cameras
that support the motion detection search function in advance. Refer to the "readme.txt" on the provided
CD-ROM about the supported cameras. Refer to the operating instructions of the camera in use for further
information.
Step 1
Step 3
Click [Search] button on the playback operation panel
and click [VMD] tab.
→→ The VMD search panel is displayed.
Designate the time range to search.
Set the year, month, day and time of the start and
end point by clicking the respective [▲]/[▼] buttons.
Note:
•It is also possible to set the start point and end
point of the search range by clicking the [Start]/
[End] buttons after selecting the desired time in
the [Playback] box and clicking the desired date
on the calendar.
Step 2
Select a camera that you want to search on the camera number panel.
140
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Step 4
Click the [Search] button.
→→ This will run a VMD search within the designated
search range and display a list of results as follows.
It is possible to switch between list pages by
clicking the [Previous]/[Next] buttons.
Change list size button
[Change list size] button
Displays/Hides the list.
Note:
•Up to 100 logs are displayed in the list. When
more than 100 logs are filed in the search result,
"> 100" will be displayed.
•The VMD search function searches the entire
camera image by default. To designate a search
area, click [Filtering] button and set the search
area on the filtering panel. (☞ Page 142)
•It may take some time until the search results are
displayed.
Step 5
Select the line with the desired list, and click the playback button on the playback operation panel.
(☞ Page 131)
→→ Playback will start from the date & time selected.
Note:
•Playback can also be started by double-clicking
the desired date & time line.
Step 6
To stop playback and return to live images, click the
stop button on the playback operation panel.
(☞ Page 131)
→→ Playback will stop, and live images will be displayed.
141
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Set up VMD areas, etc. [Filtering]
Assign the search area, setup the motion detection area in the image and masking period.
Step 1
Click [Search] button on the playback operation panel
and click [VMD] tab. (☞ Page 140)
Step 2
Select a camera that you want to search on the camera number panel.
Step 3
Click the [Filtering] button.
→→ The filtering panel will be displayed.
Note:
•As the detection areas will be set up to match the
image display area divided into 16×16 segments,
the top left and bottom right detection areas may
not be exactly as designated.
•It is impossible to delete the detection area that
has been set. To change the detection area setting, perform Step 3 again.
[Designate the search range]
Designate the time range to search.
→→ Set the "Start" and "End" by clicking [▲]/[▼] button of the date and time respectively.
[Detection area setup]
Click 2 points of the upper left and lower right to create a square to be set as the area on the displayed
image.
→→ The set area will be displayed in gray, and the
area will become subject to be searched for
motion detection.
[Mask duration setup]
If VMD search takes too much time or the search produces too many results, set a mask duration to
reduce the search frequency. When mask duration is
set, no motion detection will be performed from the
time motion is detected to the time mask duration is
set.
To set, click the [▼] button next to [Mask duration
setup] on the advances setup panel.
Mask duration: 1 s/ 5 s/ 10 s/ 30 s/ 1 min/ 5 min/ 10 min
Default: 10 s
Step 4
Clicking the [Search] button will start searching by the
assigned conditions.
142
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Copy recorded images
Copy the recorded image on the recorder to an external storage device (external HDD, USB memory stick).
Personal information may be included in copied images. Take an extra caution to handle and manage the
medium used for copying to prevent from information leakage.
It is impossible to copy recorded images when the recorder is in the following statuses.
•When the copy window is being opened by other user via a network
•When the medium (external storage device) is being selected by another user via network
•When the medium (external storage device) is selected as the playback medium
The copied recorded images can be played on the recorder or on a PC using the dedicated viewer software.
The viewer software will automatically be copied on the storage medium (external storage device) on which
recorded images are copied. Refer to page 187 for how to operate the viewer software. Refer to page 147 for
how to play the copied recorded images on the recorder.
The original (n3r: video, n3a: audio) file or MP4 file copied on the external storage device can be played back on
the recorder.
Note:
•When copying images onto an external storage device, format the device first before starting copying.
•Required time for copying varies depending on the data size to be copied. It will take longer time to copy
recorded images when they were recorded with a larger image capture size, in a higher quality or at a higher
frame rate even though the same number of cameras and the same duration are set for copying.
•Copying of recorded images may sometimes be performed incorrectly when there exist 2 or more images
recorded at the same date & time resulting in change of the date & time setting or the auto time adjustment
function.
•In the following cases, the copying currently being performed will stop.
• When any of the settings of the recorder is changed
• When a user who started manual copy logged out (It will take around 90 seconds until copying is
stopped after the web browser is closed.)
• When the original data (source for copying) is lost (overwritten or malfunction of the hard disk drive)
Step 1
Connect an external storage device to the copy port
[COPY] of the recorder.
Step 2
Click the [Copy] button on the operation panel of the
main monitor.
→→ The copy panel will be displayed (if in playback
mode, playback will be paused).
Note:
•The copy panel cannot be displayed in the web
browser when it has already been opened by
another user. When copying is already underway,
the copying window will be displayed.
143
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Note:
•Images recorded in H.264 or H.265 can be copied
in MP4 format. If audio is recorded in AAC-LC, the
image is copied in MP4 format with audio.
•Copying and downloading (☞ Page 181) in MP4
format are available for up to 2 users at the same
time.
•To attach a code for alteration detection, click the
[Advanced] button. On the advanced setup window,
set [Attach the alteration detection code] to "On".
Step 3
Set copying conditions following the instructions on
the screen.
Clicking [Next]/[Back] button switches the page. Click
the [×] button to close the window.
Item
Camera selection
Description
Check the number of the camera
whose recorded data is to be copied.
Checking [All] will copy the recorded
data of all cameras.
Date & Time range Specify times and dates to define the
range for copying recorded data. Set
the year, month, date & time of the
start point and end point.
It is also possible to set the start point
and end point of the filter range by
clicking the [Start]/[End] buttons after
clicking the desired date on the
calendar and then selecting the
desired time in the [Playback] box.
File format selection Check the file format (Original (n3r/
n3a), MP4) of the recorded image to
be copied.
Free:
The remaining space of the storage medium will be
displayed.
Data size:
The total volume of all recorded images to be copied (including the viewer software) will be displayed.
* Indicated as *.** GB while the data volume is
being calculated.
* When the calculated value exceeds the remaining
volume during calculation, ">" will be indicated in
front of the data size, and the calculation stops.
* If ">" is indicated even though the calculated
value is smaller than the remaining volume, it
means that over 10000 of recorded data exists as
target.
•When you assign a password to the data that you
will copy, click the [Advanced setup] button and
set "On" for [Assign a password] on the displayed
advanced setup screen.
•Clicking the [Back] button will return to the copy
panel.
Step 4
Click the [Copy] button on the copy panel.
→→ If [Assign a password] is set to "On", the password entry screen will be displayed.
Otherwise proceed to Step 6.
144
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
•Due to characteristics of the file system, the copying time becomes longer as the number of recording data copied to the external storage device at
one time increases. To copy a massive number of
files, keep the number of files to handle at one
time less than 10000. And every time the copy is
finished, it is recommended to disconnect the
memory device and connect it again.
•The progress of the copy is calculated based on
the size displayed as "Data size". If copying more
than 10000 files, correct value will not be displayed.
Step 5
Enter the password, and then click the [Next] button.
For character entry, refer to "About the operation of
on-screen keyboard" (☞ Installation Guide Page 8).
•Enter 5 to 8 alphanumeric characters for a password.
•To confirm the password, enter the same password again into the "Retype password" column.
•To save the entered password, check "Memorize
password temporarily". The next time data is copied, the password entry window will open with the
password already filled in. The password will be
retained in memory until the power of the recorder
is turned off.
→→ The copy start confirmation window will be displayed.
Step 7
Once the copying process is completed, the copy
complete window will be displayed. Click the "Close"
button and remove the external storage device.
Step 6
Note:
•Usage time varies depending on the capacity of
the external storage device or the recording content. Retry again later if you fail in operation.
Click the [OK] button in the copy start confirmation
window.
→→ Switches to the copying window and displays
copying progress.
Important:
•Do not disconnect the external storage device
when copying is being performed. Otherwise the
data stored on the external storage device could
be lost.
•If the copy destination lacks sufficient remaining
storage capacity, copying will continue until the
medium is full. Use a medium with sufficient storage capacity to avoid left over data that is not
copied.
•Copying will be performed in the following order:
Viewer Software → Images → Audio Depending
on the designated time range for copying and the
remaining space of the storage medium, images
and audio may not be copied.
•Clicking the [Copy] button during the copying process will display the copying window. Clicking the
[Cancel] button will display the copy cancel confirmation window. Copying continues while the copy
cancel confirmation window is displayed.
•Do not turn off the power of the recorder while
copy is in progress. If the power is turned off while
copying, the storage media copied on will become
unusable.
•Recorded images (data) of up to 1 million can be
copied onto the external storage device. However,
it is impossible to copy any more data exceeding
these limits even when there is a sufficient remaining capacity.
145
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Format USB medium
USB medium recognizable by the recorder can be formatted by the recorder.
Important:
•Formatting will delete all data and setup information stored on a USB medium. Image data once deleted
cannot be restored.
•The file systems recognizable by the recorder are exFAT, FAT (FAT 16) and FAT 32.
•This recorder can format in FAT (FAT 16), FAT 32 and exFAT according to the capacity of the USB medium.
Step 1
Click the [Copy] button on the operation panel of the
main monitor. (☞ Page 143)
→→ The copy panel will be displayed.
Step 2
Click the [Advanced] button. (☞ Page 143)
→→ The setup menu (advanced) will be displayed.
Step 4
Click the [OK] button.
→→ Formatting of the USB medium will start, and a
window indicating that formatting is in progress
will be displayed.
When formatting is completed, the format completion window will be displayed.
Important:
•Do not turn off the power of the recorder while
formatting is in progress.
Step 3
Click the [Execute] button for "Format USB medium".
→→ The confirmation window will be displayed.
146
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Play back copied images with this recorder
Display recording images copied to the external storage device (copy data) on the list, select among them and
playback. It is possible to search for copied data using filters.
Important:
•The n3r (video)/n3a (audio) file or MP4 file copied to the external storage device can be played back.
Step 1
Connect an external storage device to the copy port
[COPY] of the recorder.
Step 2
Select [USB] of the "Disk/Medium" on the playback
operation panel.
→→ The media playback panel will be displayed. Up
to 10000 logs are displayed in the list. When more
than 10000 logs are filed in the search result,
"> 10000" will be displayed.
Filtering by camera
Select "Filtering by displaying camera". Filtering will
be applied to the camera whose image is displayed.
Filter by designating date & time
Specify the filter range by designating a date & time.
To specify the filter range, set the year, month, day
and time of the start and end point by clicking the
respective [▲]/[▼] buttons.
Note:
•When copying large amounts of data, more time is
needed to display the list.
•Original format (n3r/n3a) and MP4 format files can
not be displayed on the list at the same time.
•When connecting an external storage device to
which both original format (n3r/n3a) and MP4
format are copied, and selecting the [USB], the
original format (n3r/n3a) will be displayed with
priority.
Step 3
Click [Filtering] button to filter the number of the copied data displayed on the list. The filtering panel will
be displayed.
To play back without filtering, proceed to Step 5.
File format
Select the format for filtering.
Note:
•It is also possible to set the start point and end
point of the filter range by clicking the [Start]/[End]
buttons after clicking the desired date on the calendar and then selecting the desired time in the
[Playback] box at Step 2.
Step 4
Click the [Search] button.
→→ A list of search results for the specified filter criteria is displayed. It is possible to switch between
list pages by clicking the [Previous]/[Next] buttons.
147
Note:
•When copying large amounts of data, more time is
needed to display the list.
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Step 5
Select the line with the desired date & time, and click
the playback button on the playback operation panel.
→→ Playback will start from the date & time selected.
If the multiscreen was displayed, it will change to
the 1-screen.
Note:
•Playback can also be started by double-clicking
the desired date & time line.
•If the selected copied data is password protected,
the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter
the assigned password, and click the [OK] button.
If the wrong password is entered, the copied data
cannot be played back. For character entry, refer
to "About the operation of on-screen keyboard"
(☞ Installation Guide Page 8).
•Usage time varies depending on the capacity of
the external storage device or the recording content. Retry again later if you fail in operation.
•If you play multiple data files continuously, the
audio may not be synchronized. In this case,
pause and then restart playback.
Step 6
To stop playback and return to live images, click the
stop button on the playback operation panel.
→→ Playback will stop, and live images will be displayed.
Note:
•Playback can also be stopped and live images
can also be displayed by the following operations:
• Clicking the [×] button on the media playback
panel.
• Clicking the [Live] button on the date & time
operation panel (playback display)
• Changing the playback medium
148
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
List of operation items
The following "Top items" mainly shows operation and "Middle items", "Bottom items" and "Details"
mainly show each operation menu of the main monitor and the browser.
○, △ and × indicate operable, partially limited, inoperable respectively.
Top
items
Middle
items
Bottom items
Details
Main
body
Browser
Live
image
display
Main monitor
Ctrl screen
Image display area
○
○
Status display panel
○
○
○
○
Remarks
Operation panel
Wide view display
* Tree view is available for the browser.
[Wide view] button
○
○
Image display area
○
Status display panel
○
○
×
Operation panel
[Ctrl screen] button
Camera
operation
Sub monitor
−
−
About the
operation
panel
Multiscreen buttons
−
Digital zoom buttons
−
Mute button
−
Fisheye correction
(1PTZ/4PTZ) button
Change the camera
display position in the
wide view screen
Digital zooming in the
wide view screen
Camera operation
−
−
Panning and tilting
PT button
Camera
operation
Zoom
Focus
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
△
○
△
○
×
○
×
−
* The images are fixed in order of the
camera number for the browser.
○
×
−
* It is operable by the mouse wheel only
in the 1-screen for the recorder.
* It is available in the 1 screen/4-screen
only for the recorder and 1-screen for
the browser.
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
PT pad
Click centering
○
○
[Zoom] button
○
○
Mouse wheel zooming
○
○
Drug zooming
○
○
−
○
○
○
○
Brightness
−
Auto mode
−
Preset position
Register camera preset
positions
Move camera preset
positions
Move to home position
[Enable camera
control with mouse]
checkbox
*T
he browser will be displayed by the right
click of the mouse.
* The setup of the sub monitor is
possible, but the actual image on the
sub monitor cannot be displayed on the
browser.
* Only the 4-screen is available for the
browser.
* ×1, ×1.25, ×1.5, ×1.75, ×2, ×2.5,×3, ×3.5,
×4, ×5, ×6, ×7, ×8 are available for the
recorder and ×1, ×2, ×4 are available for
the browser.
* It is available only in the 1-screen/4screen for the recorder and the 1-screen
for the browser.
* It is operable by the mouse wheel for
the recorder.
* It can be muted by the PC setting for
the browser.
* Set it by the browser of the camera
−
* Since this is a switch of the mouse
operation on the image of the HDMI
monitor, it cannot be set from the
browser.
149
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
○
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Top
items
Middle
items
Camera
operation
Camera
setup
Alarm
action
Recording
Search/
Playback
Action to be
taken upon
an event
occurrence
Stop buzzer
only.
Cancel the
alarm action
Cancel the
error action
Display alarm
log
Display error
log
Record
images
(schedule
recording)
Play
recorded
images
Main
body
Browser
−
○
×
−
○
×
Bottom items
Details
Register home
position
Execute auto back
focus
Set up mask areas
Remarks
−
○
×
−
○
×
○
×
−
○
○
−
−
○
×
−
−
○
○
−
−
○
○
−
−
○
○
−
−
○
○
−
−
○
○
Playback operation
panel
Playback
○
○
Stop
○
○
Pause
○
○
Next image/ Prev image
○
○
Fast forwarding/reverse
fast forwarding
Next record/ Prev record
○
○
○
○
Go to last
○
Jump playback
○
○
×
Captured image
○
×
Playback status display
○
○
Wide view display
○
○
Select medium
−
○
Playback medium
−
○
○
×
Zoom/Focus
adjustment
Initial position setup
−
−
* The settings of Inclination, vertical angle
adjustment and horizontal adjustment of
the image cut area of the fisheye camera
is available.
150
[Operation via recorder's main monitor]
Top
items
Middle
items
Search/
Playback
Search and
play
Copy/
Download
Copy
Format USB
medium
Download
data (to PC)
Download
viewer (to
PC)
Main
body
Browser
−
○
○
−
○
○
○
×
×
○
○
○
−
○
○
−
○
×
○
○
Bottom items
Details
Play image recorded
at a designated date &
time
Play the latest
recorded image
Playback by
designating a timeline
Remarks
−
* The timeline is not displayed on the
browser. Play back recorded images
from the recording event list.
Play back recorded
images by designating
in REC & event list
Play images selected
from alarm and error
logs (Log search)
Search and play
recorded images
triggered by motion
detection (VMD
search)
Play back recorded
image by designating
a thumbnail
−
−
−
−
−
○
×
−
−
×
○
−
−
×
○
* The viewer software is copied together
with the recorded image.
151
[Setup Network]
Configure the network settings
The recorder can be operated using a mouse or from a web browser on a PC (excluding certain functions and
settings). On the following pages, operation from a web browser, setting up the PC and related matters will be
described.
When operating the recorder using a web browser, it is necessary in advance to configure the network settings
of the recorder and a PC.
When the network settings of the PC are as follows, it is unnecessary to configure the settings. It is possible to
configure the settings and operate the recorder using a web browser after completing the connection.
IP address: 192.168.0.2 - 192.168.0.249, 192.168.0.251 - 192.168.0.254
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.0.1
When the settings are configured differently from the above, configure the network settings of the recorder or a
PC.
Configure the network settings of the recorder
The network settings of the recorder can be configured on the [Basic] tab of the "Network" page under the setup
menu [Advanced setup].
Refer to the chapter relating to the [Basic] tab of "Network" of the setup menu on page 50 for how to operate.
Configure the network settings of the PC
The TCP/IP setting of the PC shall be changed to conform to the settings of the recorder. When using the
recorder with the default (IP address: 192.168.0.250), set the IP address of the PC to "192.168.0.xxx (a number
from 2 to 254 except 250 (this recorder))".
The settings described in these operating instructions are based on the standard settings for Windows 7. Refer
to the operating instructions of the respective OS for further information.
Important:
•Log in to the PC as an administrator.
Step 1
Click "Control Panel" on the start menu.
→→ "Control panel" will be displayed.
152
[Setup Network]
Step 2
Step 4
Click "View network status and tasks".
Click [Properties]
→→ The "Network and Sharing Center" window will be
displayed.
Step 3
Click "Local Area Connection".
→→ The "Local Area Connection Properties" window
will be displayed.
Step 5
Click "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)", and
then [Properties].
→→ The "Local Area Connection Status" window will
be displayed.
→→ The "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties" window will be displayed.
153
[Setup Network]
Step 6
Select [Use the following IP address] and set "IP
address" and "Subnet mask" as follows:
•IP address: 192.168.0.9
•Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Depending on the network configuration, it is necessary to configure "Default gateway". Contact the system administrator for further information about the
settings.
Step 7
Click the [OK] button and close the window.
154
[Setup Network]
Network security of the recorder
The security function of the recorder
① Access restriction by the user authentication
It is possible to restrict users to access the recorder by selecting "On" for "User authentication". (☞ Page 57)
② Access restriction by changing the HTTP port number
By changing the HTTP port number, it is possible to prevent illegal access such as a port scanning, etc.
(☞ Page 52)
Important:
•Design and enhance security countermeasures to prevent leakage of information such as image data,
authentication information (user name and password), alarm mail information, FTP server information, etc.
Perform the countermeasure such as the access restriction using the user.
•After the unit is accessed by the administrator, make sure to close the web browser for added security.
•Change the administrator password periodically for added security.
Enhance network security
The registration of the secure communication license allows you to encrypt the communication between the
recorder and camera and enhance the network security. The encryption of the recorded data will further
enhance the security.
Contact your dealer for secure communication. For setting details, refer to the "Operating Instructions Secure
Communication Kit" on the provided CD-ROM.
In addition, network security can be enhanced by the following measures.
It is possible to enhance the network security by dividing the subnet using a router to authenticate users twice
(by the recorder and by the router). When connecting the recorder to an unsecured network, secure the network connection by installing a VPN (Virtual Private Network) device, etc. between the recorder and the host
PC.
Important:
•The settings for the network security vary depending on the network to which the recorder is to be connected such as an intranet or Internet service provider. Refer to a network administrator for further information about the network security.
[Connection example]
IP address: 192.168.1.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Router
Router
Network
IP address: 192.168.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.1.1
IP address: 192.168.0.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 192.168.0.250
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.0.1
Recorder
PC
By using a firewall, etc., it is possible to use packet filtering and protocol filtering to enhance the network security.
155
[Setup Network]
[Connection example]
Firewall
Router
Router
IP address: 192.168.1.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Network
IP address: 192.168.0.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Switching hub
IP address: 192.168.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.1.1
Recorder
PC
IP address: 192.168.0.250
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.0.1
156
[Operation via PC web browser]
Display the operation window
Boot the PC and operate the recorder using a web browser.
•When any ActiveX control for a Panasonic
recorder other than this product is already
installed, uninstall "WebVideo ActiveX" from
"Uninstall a program" and then install ActiveX
control for this product. (☞ Page 185)
•When the installation wizard is displayed each
time displaying other page even though installation of ActiveX control for this product has been
completed, reboot the PC.
•The ActiveX control used on each PC should be
licensed individually. The recorder has the license
for 1 PC. Refer to your dealer for the software
licensing.
Step 1
Start the web browser.
Step 2
Enter the IP address or URL assigned to the recorder
into the address box, and then press the [Enter] key.
Step 3
Enter the user name and password registered in the
recorder, and then click the [Login] button.
→→ The top page will be displayed.
→→ The authentication window will be displayed. The
authentication window will not be displayed when
"Off" is selected for "User authentication" on the
[Basic] tab of "User management" under the
setup menu [Advanced setup].
Important:
•Refer to a network administrator for further information about the set IP address.
•Do not attach "0" before the numbers when entering IP address.
Example:
○: 192.168.0.50
×: 192.168.0.050
•If a message is displayed on the information bar,
see page 206.
•If the text is not displayed, add the IP address set
to the recorder to the trusted site.
Note:
•When the top page is displayed for the first time,
the install wizard of the ActiveX control required to
display images from the camera will be displayed.
Follow the instructions of the wizard.
•To install ActiveX, the computer must be logged in
by a user with "computer administrator" authorization and the web browser must be executed by
the administrator.
•The ActiveX control and the viewer software (☞
Page 185) will be installed at the same time.
157
Important:
•Refer to a system administrator for the set user
name and password.
•Refer to page 59 for how to register users.
•Change the password periodically. Refer to page
59 for how to change the password.
•Refer to page 206 when a message is displayed
on the information bar or when an unnecessary
status bar or scroll bar is displayed on the window.
[Operation via PC web browser]
About the operation window
Top Page
Status display area
Current time display area
Image display area
Download operation area
[CAM] tab
[HDD] tab
[Control] tab
Displays operations such as searching for and copying recorded images, search results and log information.
It can also be used to switch camera images between
display of live images on a multiscreen, wide screen,
etc.
[Cam. select] tab
Can be used for camera operations such as switching
camera images.
[Setup] tab
Can be used to configure the settings of the recorder.
Refer to the "Setup via recorder's main monitor" section starting from page 9 for setup items and their
further information. Refer to page 191 for basic
operations.
Status display area
The current status of the recorder such as playback
status, recording status, etc. will be displayed.
Image display area
Playback images and live images will be displayed.
The camera title is displayed at the upper left and the
date & time (the current date & time of the camera’s
clock when displaying live images and the date &
time when the images were recorded when playing
recorded images) at the upper right. Clicking the
camera title while displaying images on a multiscreen
will display images from the respective camera on a
1-screen.
Download operation area
Downloads the images currently being played and the
viewer software.
[CAM] tab
Camera operations such as zooming, focusing, auto
mode, etc. can be performed on this tab.
[HDD] tab
Can be used to play back or operate recorded
images.
Current time display area
The current date & time will be displayed.
158
[Operation via PC web browser]
Control panel
The following operation panels will be displayed when the [Control] tab is clicked.
List display
area
[Multiscreen] box
Images recorded using up to 4 cameras can be
played simultaneously on a multi-screen. Each click
of the button switches to the next 4 screens in the
sequence: camera 1 to 4→camera 5 to 8→camera 9
to 12→camera 13 to 16.
Disk/Medium
Select a destination folder to store the current playing
images.
HDD/USB
[Wide view] box
Displays live or recorded images on a full-screen.
(☞ Page 166)
[Digital zoom] box
Camera image displayed on a 1-screen will be displayed in the proportion of the clicked zoom ratio button.
[×1]: ×1, [×2]: ×2, [×4]: ×4
[Search] box
Use this button to search recorded images. The
search result will be displayed in the list display area.
•[REC event] button
Select [HDD] for "Disk/Medium" to display this
button. The recording event search window will
be displayed.
•[Copy data] button
Select [USB] for "Disk/Medium" to display this
button. Displays the copy data search window.
[Copy] button
Select [HDD] for "Disk/Medium" to display this button.
Displays the copy window. Use this button to copy
the recorded images to an external storage device.
[Log] box
Select a log for display.
Clicking the buttons will display the respective logs in
the list display area.
Displayed logs: Alarm log, error log
•[VMD] button
Select [HDD] for "Disk/Medium" to display this
button. The motion detection search window will
be displayed.
159
•[Close] button
Close the window displaying log information.
[Operation via PC web browser]
List display area
Total: Displays the total number of listed data.
No.: The number will be displayed in the order of
occurrence.
Date & List: Date & time when an event or trouble
occurred will be displayed.
Log: Details of the occurred event are displayed.
The following are the maximum number of logs
that can be saved. When the number of logs
exceeds the limit, the older logs will be overwritten by the newer logs. In this case, the oldest log
is the first to be overwritten.
Alarm log: Up to 1000
Error log: Up to 1000
Clicking date & time in the list can start playback from
that date & time. (When clicking date & time in the log
information, playback will be started from a point
approx. 5 seconds before the date & time selected.)
To display search results or a list of copied data, refer
to "Search and play recording events" (☞ Page 175)
and "Check a list of copied recorded images" (☞ Page
183), respectively.
Note:
•To start playback from the beginning of the preevent recording when the "Pre-event duration"
setting is longer than 5 seconds, click the playback button, and then click the previous record
button.
•The corresponding recorded data that is displayed
in the selected log list cannot be played if the data
has already been overwritten or erased.
Camera selection panel
Clicking the [Cam. select] tab will display the operation panel shown below. Switch the image display area and
select camera images.
Camera selection box
For the [Multiscreen] box, [Wide view] box and [Digital zoom] box, refer to "Control Panel" (☞ Page 159).
Camera selection box
Clicking the camera title will display images from the
selected camera on a 1-screen in the image display
area. Setting the [Group display] of [Monitor] - [Web
browser] to "On" (☞ Page 192) enables the group
display of cameras.
160
[Operation via PC web browser]
Setup panel
The following setup panel will be displayed when the [Setup] tab is clicked. The settings such as the date &
time display of the recorder can be configured.
Refer to the "Setup via recorder's main monitor" section starting from page 9 for setup items and their further information. Refer to page 191 for basic operations.
[Date/Language] button
Displays the "Date/Language" page. Perform settings
such as date & time and daylight saving time.
[Camera] button
Displays the "Camera" page.
Perform registration of network cameras.
[REC & event] button
Displays the "REC & event" page. Configure the settings relating to the recording schedules and alarms.
[Monitor] button
Configure the settings relating to the main monitor
and the sub monitor.
[Network] button
Configure the settings relating to the network.
[User management] button
Register, edit or delete the user information. The
administrator information can also be changed.
[Maintenance] button
Displays the system information of the recorder. It is
used for registration of license and firmware update.
[HDD management] button
Format the HDD or change the operation mode of
HDDs.
[Extra function] button
Sets the security function.
161
[Operation via PC web browser]
Status display area
Live/playback status display area
Other status display area
Recording indicator
Live/playback status display area
The status of an image (live image/recorded image)
will be displayed. The following information will be
displayed:
: Indicates that live images are being displayed.
: Indicates that playback images are being
displayed.
: Indicates that reverse playback images are
being displayed.
: Indicates that fast playback images are
being displayed.
: Indicates that fast reverse playback images
are being displayed.
: Indicates that a paused image is being displayed.
: Indicates that recorded images/audio are
being downloaded.
: Indicates that downloading of recorded
images/audio is completed.
: Indicates that data recovery in the RAID
mode is being performed.
: Indicates filtering of recording events.
Recording indicator
Indicates the status of recording.
: Indicates that recording is being performed.
: Indicates that recording is not being performed.
Other status display area
Indicates the following statuses.
: Indicates that the camera is inoperable
since a user with a higher priority is currently
operating the camera.
:
Indicates
that copying is being performed.
: Indicates that recorded images are being
deleted. (Auto deletion only)
[Step 1] - [Step 7]
Indicates the playback speed.
: Normal playback speed (1x)
: Approx. 4x playback speed
: Approx. 8x playback speed
: Approx. 16x playback speed
: Approx. 32x playback speed
: Approx. 48x playback speed
: Approx. 96x playback speed
Alarm button [ALM]
This button will be displayed when an event occurs.
The alarm action will be canceled by clicking this button.
Error button [ERR]
This button will be displayed when an error occurs.
The error action will be canceled by clicking this button.
: Indicates that the HDD is selected as
playback media.
: Indicates that the USB medium is selected.
: Indicates that the formatting of the HDD
or the USB medium is in progress.
: Indicates that SD memory data is being
obtained.
162
Note:
•Once an emergency recording starts, it will not
stop even by clicking the [ALM] button. It will stop
only when "Ext." is selected for "Recording duration" on the "Emergency rec." page.
[Operation via PC web browser]
Download operation area
[Start]/[End] setup
[Start]/[End] setup
Specify the time range for downloading images and
audio by setting a start and end time. This operation
is available only during playback on a 1-screen.
(☞ Page 181)
[Viewer] button
Download the viewer software for playing the downloaded images and audio.
[Download] button
Downloads recorded images and audio at the designated date & time.
[CAM] tab
When displaying live images from a camera with the panning/tilting function, the following camera controls are
available. Depending on the model of the camera, some operations may not work.
Control buttons/Control pad
[Zoom] box
Zooming can be adjusted by clicking the [–] button
(wide) or the [+] button (tele). Click the [x1] button to
reset the zoom factor to x1.
[Focus] box
Focusing can be adjusted by clicking the [Near] button or the [Far] button. The auto focus function can
be performed by clicking the [Auto] button.
[Auto mode/AUX/Wiper] box
Switch the operation mode in the box to use it. Refer
to page 169 for the details.
Control buttons/Control pad
Clicking the buttons around the control pad can move
(pan/tilt) a camera in the clicked direction. Clicking
inside the control pad also can adjust the vertical/horizontal position (pan/tilt) of the displayed images.
Panning/ tilting speed will be faster if a clicked point
gets farther from the center point of the control pad.
[Brightness] box
The brightness (lens iris) can be adjusted by clicking
the [–] (darker) button or the [+] (brighter) button. It is
possible to reset the adjusted brightness by clicking
the [Reset] button.
163
[Operation via PC web browser]
[Preset Position] box
•[Regist] button
Register the current camera position as a preset
position.
Select a preset position number (1 - 256) by clicking the [▼] button after moving the camera to a
position to be registered as a preset position, and
then click the [Regist] button. It is impossible to
register the position as "Home".
•[Call] button
Moves the camera to the preset position registered in advance.
Select a preset position number (Home, 1 - 256)
by clicking the [▼] button, and then click the [Call]
button. It is necessary to register preset positions
in advance to move the camera to the preset
positions.
[HDD] tab
[Play]/[Rev play] button
Plays recorded images in forward or reverse.
[FF]/[FR] button
Plays recorded images at high speed in forward or
reverse.
Playback speed of fast playback will change in the
following order each time this button is clicked:
Step2 (Approx. 4x) → Step3 (Approx. 8x) →Step4
(Approx. 16x) → Step5 (Approx. 32x) →Step6
(Approx. 48x) → Step7 (Approx. 96x)
[Next record]/[Prev record] button
Skips to the next recorded image or previous
recorded image and plays it.
[Next image]/[Prev image] button
Clicking this button during playback/pausing will display the next or previous frame and playback will be
paused.
[Pause] button
Playback will be paused when this button is clicked
during playback. Playback will start when this button
is clicked during pause.
[Stop] button
Stops playback and displays live images.
[Go to last] button
The starting point of playback is approx. 10 seconds
before the date & time of the latest recorded images.
Depending on the recording settings, images may be
played back more than 10 seconds before.
[Date search] box
Start playback by designating the desired date & time
of image. Click the [▼] button and determine the
desired date & time.
Clicking the [Date search] button will play back the
images corresponding to the selected date.
164
[Operation via PC web browser]
Monitor live images
Live images will be displayed in the web browser window. It is possible to display live images on a 1-screen or
a 4-screen (multiscreen) and to expand the image display area across the full screen.
Display images on a 1-screen
To display live images on a 1-screen, take the following procedures.
Step 1
Click the [Cam. select] tab. (☞ Page 158)
→→ A list of the registered cameras will be displayed
in the [Camera selection] box.
Step 2
Select the title of the camera.
→→ Live images from the selected camera will be displayed on a 1-screen.
Note:
•Selecting a camera from the right-click pop-up
menu also will display images from the selected
camera.
•Clicking the [Go to last] button on the [HDD] tab
while displaying live images will start playback
from a point around 10 seconds before the latest
recorded image of the camera currently being displayed. Depending on the recording settings,
images may be played back more than 10 seconds before.
•The image will be displayed by dropping the frame
temporarily if the drawing process is delayed from
the load state or PC performance.
Use digital zoom
Enlarges the displayed live images.
When playing recorded images on a 1-screen, click a button in the [Digital zoom] box.
[×1] button: Displays live images with ×1 zoomed size.
[×2] button: Displays live images with ×2 zoomed size.
[×4] button: Displays live images with ×4 zoomed size.
Clicking a point in the zoomed image makes the clicked point the center of the image.
165
[Operation via PC web browser]
Display images in wide view
Display live images across the full screen. When working on a 1-screen, click the [Wide view] button (the operation panel will disappear).
To return the wide view image to the original size, right-click on the image and select [Ctrl screen] from the displayed menu.
Note:
•To enlarge the displayed live images, also right-click on the live images and select [Wide view] from the displayed menu.
Display images on a 4-screen (multiscreen)
Live images from cameras will be displayed on a 4-screen.
Step 1
Click the [Cam. select] tab.
→→ A list of the registered cameras will be displayed
in the [Camera selection] box. (☞ Page 160)
Step 2
Click the [Multiscreen] button.
→→ Live images from the cameras (registered as a
group) will be displayed on a 4-screen.
Step 3
Each click of the [Multiscreen] button switches to the
next 4 screens in the sequence: camera 1 to 4→camera 5 to 8→camera 9 to 12→camera 13 to 16... If a
set of 4 cameras are not registered on the 4-screen, it
will be skipped.
Step 4
Click a camera title in the [Camera selection] box or
the camera title displayed on the image to display on
a 1- screen again.
→→ The display returns to the 1-screen.
166
Note:
•To change the screen pattern to a multi-screen,
right-click on the live images and select the item
from the displayed menu.
•Selecting [Wide view] from the right-click menu
will enlarge the displayed images on a 4-screen.
•When over FHD (1920×1080) is to be selected for
the image capture size, the images will be displayed with the selected refresh interval.
•If the resolution of the recording setting is high,
the displayed image will be coarse. The image will
be clear when it is displayed in wide view or
1-screen.
•Clicking the [Go to last] button on the [HDD] tab
while displaying live images will start playback
from a point around 10 seconds before the latest
recorded image of the camera currently being displayed. Depending on the recording settings,
images may be played back more than 10 seconds before.
•When playing recorded images on a 4-screen, the
audio of the camera assigned to the top left
screen segment will be output.
•When starting VMD search while displaying
images on a multiscreen, the camera image displayed in the top left screen segment will be
searched.
[Operation via PC web browser]
Operate the camera
When displaying live images from a camera with the panning/tilting function, the following camera controls are
available. It may be impossible to operate the camera or some functions may be inoperable depending on the
model of the camera.
•Panning/Tilting:
Adjusts the horizontal/vertical position of the camera.
•Zoom:
Zoom in/out the displayed image.
•Focus:
Adjust the focal point.
•Brightness:
Adjusts the lens iris of the camera.
•Preset position operation:Move the camera to the preset position (that is determined on the camera’s
setup menu and registered in the recorder).
•Auto mode/AUX/Wiper: Activates the auto mode function/AUX function/wiper function of the camera.
To operate the camera, display the [CAM] tab of the top page.
Control buttons/Control pad
Panning/Tilting
When displaying live images on a 1-screen, moves a camera horizontally/vertically in the following ways.
Control buttons
Click to move (pan/tilt) a camera in the clicked direction.
Control pad
Click to move (pan/tilt) a camera in the clicked direction. Panning/ tilting speed will be faster if a clicked point
gets farther from the center point of the control pad.
Note:
•Click the desired point to be located at the center of the angular field of view. The camera will move to
locate the clicked point as the center point in the image display area.
Zooming
Zoom in/out the displayed image. Depending on the models of the connected cameras, the available zooming
factors may be different. Refer to the operating instructions of the camera for further information.
Zooming can be adjusted by clicking the [–] button (wide) or the [+] button (tele). Click the [×1] button to reset
the zoom factor to ×1.
Note:
•It is possible to adjust zooming by turning the mouse wheel.
•When selecting an area in the image display area by dragging the mouse, the selected area will be located
at the center of the image display area and the zoom ratio will be adjusted automatically.
167
[Operation via PC web browser]
Focus adjustment
Adjusts the focal point. The auto focus function is available.
Focusing can be adjusted by clicking the [Near] button or the [Far] button.
The auto focus function can be performed by clicking the [Auto] button.
Iris (brightness) adjustment
Adjusts the lens iris of the camera.
The brightness (lens iris) can be adjusted by clicking the [–] (darker) button or the [+] (brighter) button. It is possible to reset the adjusted brightness by clicking the [Reset] button.
Register preset positions
Registers the current camera position as a preset position. Camera supporting the preset position function can
be used.
Step 1
Perform the pan/tilt operation to move the camera to
the position to be registered.
Step 3
Click the [Regist] button.
→→ The preset position will be registered under the
selected preset number.
Step 2
Note:
•Some preset numbers may not be registered
depending on the model of the connected camera. Please refer to the user manual of your camera for the preset registration function of the camera.
Click the [▼] button in the [Preset Position] box to
select a preset number (1 - 256). (It is impossible to
register the position as "Home".)
Move to preset positions
Moves the camera to the preset position registered in advance. Preset positions need to be registered in
advance.
Step 1
Click the [▼] button in the [Preset Position] box to
select a preset number (Home, 1 - 256).
Step 2
Click the [Call] button.
→→ The camera moves to the registered preset position respective to the selected preset number.
168
[Operation via PC web browser]
Auto mode/AUX/Wiper
Select and activate the auto mode function/AUX function/wiper function of the camera.
Auto mode function
Wiper function
Wiper/Washer of WV-SUD638 can be operated.
Step 1
Select "Auto mode" for the operation mode. Click [▼]
button and select an auto mode that you want to
operate.
Auto track: The camera will automatically track an
object moving on the screen.
Auto pan: The camera direction will automatically
move (pan) between the start point and end
point set in advance.
Preset sequence: The camera will move to the
preset positions registered in advance in order
of the preset position number (numerical
order).
Patrol: The camera will trace the manually
recorded panning pattern.
Step 1
Change the operation mode from "Auto mode" to
"Wiper" and select a wiper function from the following.
High: Wipes out continuously. (once per 4 seconds)
Low: Wipes out continuously. (once per 8 seconds)
1 shot: Performs high speed wiping (once per 4
seconds) 5 times.
Washer: Performs the specified washer/wiper
operation.
Refer to the operating instruction of WV-SUD638.
Step 2
Step 2
Click the [Start] button to start the selected auto
mode function of the camera.
Click the [Stop] button to turn off the auto mode function.
When [Start] button is clicked, the selected motion
starts.
When [Stop] button is clicked, the motion ends.
Note:
•When you use the auto mode, please read the
operating instructions of your camera and set the
auto mode at the camera menu in advance.
AUX function
Step 1
Change the operation mode from "Auto mode" to
"AUX" and select a terminal number of the AUX.
Step 2
Open: The AUX terminal becomes open.
Close: The AUX terminal becomes close.
169
Note:
•The following operation is not available while the
washer is operating.
• [Start] and [Stop] operation of "Wiper"
• Control of panning, tilting zooming and focusing
• [Start] operation of "Auto mode"
• [Call] operation of "Preset Position"
•It requires the washer operation settings for the
camera side. Refer to the operating instruction of
WV-SUD638.
[Operation via PC web browser]
Event function
The recorder will take an event action when any of the following events occur.
Terminal alarm:
An event when an alarm input signal is supplied from an external device such as a
door sensor to the alarm input terminal on the rear of the recorder.
Camera site alarm:
An event when an alarm (camera terminal alarm, etc.) is detected by a camera.
Command alarm:
An alarm when receiving an alarm from a PC, etc. via a network.
Action to be taken upon an event occurrence
When the recorder recognizes an event, it will take an event action according to the set action mode.
Refer to the "Event action mode" (☞ Page 124) for further information about the event action and action mode.
The actions that can be set up and checked from a PC when an event occurs are described below.
Display the alarm message
A window that notifies of an event occurrence will be displayed.
Click the [OK] button or the [×] button to close the window. When several events occur at the same time, the
information for the event that occurred last will be displayed.
Display the alarm button
The [ALM] button will be displayed in the status display area. The alarm action will be canceled by clicking [ALM] button. (☞ Page 171)
Display the error button
The [ERR] button will be displayed in the status display area. The error action will be canceled by clicking [ERR] button. (☞ Page 171)
Provide an alarm notification to a PC according to
the Panasonic alarm protocol setting
When an event or an error occurs, information about
the event/ error will automatically be notified to the
registered PC according to the "Panasonic alarm protocol" setting. To receive a notification and display
the contents, it is necessary to install the dedicated
software (option).
Refer to the "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM
about the dedicated software.
Send a mail that notifies of an event occurrence
A mail that notifies of the event occurrence with the
date & time of the event occurrence will be sent
(Alarm mail).
Up to 4 destination addresses for the alarm mail can
be registered.
170
[Operation via PC web browser]
Cancel the alarm action
To cancel the alarm action manually, click the [ALM] button in the status display area.
→→ The alarm action will be canceled. The event recording will stop and return to the operational status just
before the event occurred.
Cancel the error action
When an error (trouble) occurred on the recorder, the recorder will take the error action (a series of actions that
notifies of the error occurrence). An error display window providing information on the error that occurred will
be displayed on the web browser. To cancel the error action manually, close the error display window, and click
the [ERR] button in the status display area.
→→ The error action will be canceled.
Note:
•When an error occurs, take remedial action by following the instructions displayed on the error log panel
(☞ Page 138). The error indicator on the front of the recorder will go off when the cause of the error has
been eliminated.
•The [ERR] button is continuously displayed even if the cause of the error is automatically resolved. Click the
[ERR] button to turn it off.
171
[Operation via PC web browser]
Play recorded images
Display camera images recorded on the recorder’s hard disk. There are 2 ways to play recorded images as follows. Play image recorded at a designated date & time. Search and play recorded images. Playback operation
can be made while recording.
Step 1
Click the [HDD] tab on the top page of the operation
window.
→→ The [HDD] tab will be displayed.
Step 2
Click the [Play] button.
→→ Playback of a recorded image will be performed.
The "Playback" indication and the "Step 1" indication will be displayed on the status display
area.
Playback will start from the point at which the last
playback was stopped (date & time).
Step 3
Click the [Stop] button on the [HDD] tab.
→→ "Playback" and "Step 1" will disappear from the
status display area, and playback will stop. Live
images from the camera will be displayed on the
image display area.
Note:
•When displaying images on a 1-screen, audio
assigned to the camera from which images are
currently being displayed will be heard. When displaying images on a multiscreen, audio assigned
to the camera from which images are displayed
on the upper left corner will be heard.
•When starting playback for the first time after
login, playback will start from a point around 10
seconds before the latest recorded image.
While recording, the playback starts 10 seconds
prior to the current time. Depending on the
recording settings, images may be played back
more than 10 seconds before.
172
•When both a web browser and the viewer software are active, playback of audio may not be
performed correctly. To play audio correctly, use
either the web browser or the viewer software and
close the other.
•When load to be processed is too heavy for the
recorder (such as when many cameras are connected, images (live/playback) are displayed on
many windows (segments)), playback speed may
become slow or playback may stop for a while.
•During 1-screen playback, the image will be
played by slowing the playback speed temporarily
if the drawing process is delayed from the load
state or PC performance. At this time, audio will
be muted.
•During 4-screen playback, images with a capture
size exceeding FHD (1920×1080) will be displayed
with the selected refresh interval.
•When playing images recorded at a higher frame
rate and images recorded at a lower frame rate
together on a multiscreen, there will be a widening
gap between the displayed times.
•Playback images and audio may sometimes not
be synchronized exactly.
•The camera image can be changed by clicking the
[Cam. select] tab and the camera title during playback.
•It is possible to switch 1-screen to a multi-screen
during playback by clicking the [Multiscreen] button.
•When clicking a camera title on the image displayed on a multiscreen, images from the camera
whose camera title is clicked will be displayed on
a 1-screen.
•The playback video may temporary stop or the
image may not be displayed if the vicinity of the
current time is continuously being displayed. If the
data is played back in a multi-screen, video may
temporarily stop or the image may not be displayed a part of the camera.
[Operation via PC web browser]
About playback operation
The following operations are available during playback:
Function
[Play]/[Rev play] button
Example
/
Operation
• Plays recorded images.
• Plays back recorded images in reverse.
* Playback and reverse playback may not work when the [Play] or
[Rev play] button is clicked while recording images at a lower
frame rate.
[Stop] button
• Playback will stop and live images will be displayed when this
button is clicked during playback.
[Pause] button
• Playback will be paused when this button is clicked during
playback.
• Playback will resume when this button is clicked during pause.
[FF]/[FR] button
/
• Playback speed of fast playback will be changed in the following
order each time the [FF] button is clicked:
Step2 (Approx. ×4) → Step3 (Approx. ×8) → Step4 (Approx. ×16)
→ Step5 (Approx. ×32) → Step6 (Approx. ×48) → Step7 (Approx.
×96)
• Playback speed of fast reverse playback will be changed in the
following order each time the [FR] button is clicked:
Step2 (Approx. ×4) → Step3 (Approx. ×8) → Step4 (Approx. ×16)
→ Step5 (Approx. ×32) → Step6 (Approx. ×48) → Step7 (Approx.
×96)
• The step of the playback speed will be displayed on the
playback status display.
* When playing H.264/H.265 images, some frames of recorded
images will not be displayed. Fast playback/fast reverse
playback of images will be performed with the refresh interval
setting of the camera.
[Next record]/[Prev record]
button
/
• When the [Next record] button is clicked, playback point will skip
to the start time of the next recorded images.
• When the [Prev record] button is clicked, playback point will skip
to the start time of the previous recorded images.
* When there is no next/previous recorded image to be skipped
to, the current playback will continue. In this case, playback time
of the current playback may sometimes be displayed as around
for 1 minute ago.
[Next image]/[Prev image]
button
/
• The next frame will be displayed when the [Next image] button is
clicked during playback/pause, and playback will pause.
• The previous frame will be displayed when the [Prev image]
button is clicked during playback/pause, and playback will pause.
* When playing H.264/H.265 images, some frames of recorded
images will not be displayed. Reverse frame-by-frame playback
will be performed with the refresh interval setting of the camera.
[Go to last] button
• When this button is clicked, playback of the latest recorded
images will start. The starting point is around 10 seconds before
the date & time of the latest recorded images.
While recording, the playback starts 10 seconds prior to the
current time. Depending on the recording settings, images may
be played back more than 10 seconds before.
* When the [Go to last] button is clicked while recording images at
a lower frame rate, playback of the latest recorded images may
be paused or images may not be displayed.
The playback video may temporary stop or the image may not
be displayed if the vicinity of the current time is continuously
being displayed.
Refer to the page 159 for further information about the [Multiscreen], [Digital zoom] and [Wide view].
173
[Operation via PC web browser]
Play image recorded at a designated date & time
Start playback by designating the desired date & time
of a recorded image. Playback operation can be
made while recording.
Step 1
Click the [Cam. select] tab on the top page of the
operation window, and select a camera for playback
from the camera selection box. (☞ Page 160)
Step 2
Click the [HDD] tab. (☞ Page 158)
Step 3
Click the [▼] button and determine the date & time of
the desired images.
Step 4
Click the [Date search] button.
→→ "Playback" and "Step 1" will be displayed in the
status display area, and playback will start from
the image corresponding to the designated date
& time.
(About playback operation: "Play recorded
images" (☞ Page 173))
Note:
•When playing H.264/H.265 image by designating
date & time, playback may start from a point several seconds before or after the designated date &
time.
•When no recorded image found at the designated
date & time, playback of images recorded after
and at the closest to the designated date & time
will start.
174
[Operation via PC web browser]
Search and play recording events (REC event search)
Search the recording event list for a recording event and play it back.
Important:
•To use recording event search, "HDD" must be selected for [Disk/Medium].
It is also possible to filter recording events using the search filters.
[Camera]
Searches for images recorded with each selected
camera. Mark the checkbox corresponding to the
desired camera. When the checkbox for [All] is
marked, the checkboxes of all cameras can be
marked.
Step 1
Click the [Control] tab on the top page (☞ Page 158)
of the operation window, and click the [REC event]
button in the [Search] box.
→→ The recording event search window will be displayed.
Step 2
Specify the search conditions (filters).
[Date & time range]
Select a time range by designating a start and end
date & time. The designated time range will be
searched.
[REC event]
Searches for images recorded by the selected
recording mode only. Check the checkbox corresponding to the desired event type. When the checkbox for [All] is marked, the checkboxes of all of the
following events can be marked:
Schedule [SCH]: Recording by the schedule
recording event
Terminal alarm [TRM]: Recording triggered by a
terminal alarm
Command alarm [COM]: Recording triggered by a
command alarm
Camera site alarm [CAM]: Recording triggered by
camera site alarm
Emergency [EMR]: Recording triggered by the
emergency recording event
SD backup rec. [SD]: Recording by the SD memory backup function
175
[Operation via PC web browser]
Step 3
Click the [OK] button.
→→ "FILTERING" appears in the status display area,
and the filtered result will be displayed in the list
display area.
[Date]
Start time of recording will be displayed.
[Cam]
The camera which recorded the images will be displayed.
[Evt]
Event type will be displayed. (☞ Page 175)
[HDD]
The hard disk drive number in which the corresponding recorded images are stored will be displayed.
[Audio]
When audio is attached to recorded images, the
audio icon will be displayed.
Note:
•The [All list] button will become unavailable during
playback. To use the [All list] button, stop playback and click it.
•When many cameras are connected, the recording start time of each camera may sometimes not
be the same.
Step 4
Click the date & time of the desired recording event.
→→ Playback of recorded images of the selected
recording event will start. (About playback operation (☞ Page 173))
[Total]
Displays the total number of searched data. When
more than 10001 data matched, the "> 10000" indication will be displayed.
[All list] button
Cancels filtering and displays all recording events.
[Refresh] button
Updates the list to the latest one.
[Prev page (<)] button
Displays the previous page of the list.
[Next page (>)] button
Displays the next page of the list.
176
[Operation via PC web browser]
Motion detection search and playback (VMD search)
Search for recorded images from images recorded triggered by the VMD function of cameras by designating a
time range. Click a date & time on the result list to play corresponding recorded images.
Important:
•To perform the VMD search, it is necessary to configure the settings of the connected cameras that support
the motion detection function in advance. Refer to the "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM about cameras supporting the VMD search function. Refer to the operating instructions of the camera in use for further
information.
Step 1
Click the [Control] tab on the top page (☞ Page 158)
of the operation window, and click the [VMD] button
in the [Search] box.
→→ The "VMD search" window will be displayed. The
still image of the latest data will be displayed.
Step 3
Set up a VMD area. Drag the mouse on the screen.
→→ A frame will be displayed, and the area within the
frame will be set as VMD search area.
Note:
•To delete the created area, click the [Delete area]
button.
Step 2
Specify the search conditions (filters).
[Camera]
Select the camera for VMD search.
[Date & time range]
Select a time range by designating a start and end
date & time. The designated time range will be
searched.
Step 4
Click the [OK] button.
→→ The VMD search will start. The search result will be
displayed in the list display area. (☞ Page 176) It
may sometimes take time to complete the search.
Important:
•In the result list of the VMD search, the audio icon
will not be displayed in the "Audio" column even if
audio is attached to the recorded images.
[Mask duration]
Select the time span to be searched.
177
[Operation via PC web browser]
Step 5
Click the date & time of the desired recording event.
→→ Playback of recorded images of the selected
recording event will start. (About playback operation (☞ Page 173))
Note:
•Up to 100 logs are displayed in the list. When
more than 100 logs are filed in the search result,
"> 100" will be indicated.
•Recorded images will be played on a 1-screen. To
play on a multi-screen, click the [Multiscreen] button after starting playback.
•When starting the VMD search while displaying
images on a multiscreen, the camera whose
images are displayed at the upper left corner will
become subject to the VMD search.
178
[Operation via PC web browser]
Copy recorded images
Copy the recorded image on the recorder to an external storage device (external HDD, USB memory stick).
Refer to page 143 for further information about the copy function. Refer to page 185 for information on how
to play copied images.
Step 1
Click the [Control] tab on the top page (☞ Page 158)
of the operation window.
Step 3
Specify the detailed conditions of recorded images to
be copied. Specify the information to be set as conditions.
Step 2
Click the button in the [Copy] box.
[Camera]
Select the camera you wish to copy. Mark the checkbox next to the desired camera. When the checkbox
for [All] is marked, the checkboxes of all cameras can
be marked.
[Date & time range]
Designate the start point (start date & time) and the
end point (end date & time) of recorded images to be
copied. Click the [▼] button, and then designate date
& time.
→→ The "Copy" window will be displayed.
[File format]
Select the file format (Original (n3r/n3a)/MP4) of the
recorded data to be copied. Mark the checkbox
corresponding to the desired file format.
[Alteration detection]
Determine whether or not to attach the alteration
detection code to the recorded images to be copied.
When the alteration detection code is attached, it is
possible to check if the copied recorded images have
been altered or not when playing the copied recorded
images using the viewer software. Click the [▼] button, and then select "On" or "Off".
179
[Operation via PC web browser]
[Password]
To copy with password protection, mark the corresponding checkbox and enter a password. (5 to 8
alphanumeric characters) The password will be
required to play back the copied data.
[Data size]
When the [Measurement] button is clicked, size of the
data to be copied will be displayed.
[Free]
The remaining capacity of the destination medium
(external storage device) will be displayed.
Step 4
When the [OK] button is clicked, the confirmation
window will be displayed. Then click the [OK] button
on the displayed confirmation window.
→→ The data copy window will close. Copying will
start and the "COPY" icon will be displayed in the
status display area. When copying is complete,
the "COPY" icon will disappear.
180
Important:
•When copying to an external storage device is
being performed, do not disconnect the external
storage device. Otherwise the data stored on the
external storage device could be lost.
•When the copy end time is set earlier than the
start time, copying will not start even when the
[OK] button is clicked.
•When copy medium lacks enough storage space,
data will be copied until the copy medium is full.
Use a medium with sufficient storage capacity to
avoid left over data that is not copied.
•Copying will be performed in the following order:
Viewer Software → Images → Audio Depending
on the designated time range for copying and the
remaining space of the storage medium, images
and audio may not be copied.
•When clicking the button in the [Copy] box during
copying, the confirmation window for cancellation
of the current copying will be displayed. It is possible to cancel the current copying on this window.
•Do not turn off the power of the recorder while
copy is in progress. If the power is turned off while
copying, the storage media copied on will become
unusable.
•Recorded images (data) of up to 1 million can be
copied onto the external device connected to the
copy port "COPY". However, it is impossible to
copy any more data exceeding these limits even
when there is a sufficient remaining capacity.
•When another user operating the recorder has
opened the copy panel or when the destination
medium has been selected by another user, the
copy window cannot be displayed.
•When the web browser is closed during the copying process, the process will be stopped. Do not
close the web browser during the copying process.
[Operation via PC web browser]
Download recorded images currently being played
Designate the start point and the end point of recorded images currently being played and download images to
a PC.
If the original format is selected for the file format of the data to be downloaded, the recorded images will be
downloaded as an image data file (filename.n3r) and an audio data file (filename.n3a). If MP4 format is selected,
the recorded images will be downloaded as an MP4 file (filename.mp4). Refer to page 185 for information on
how to play downloaded recorded images.
Important:
•Note when downloading that, due to limitations of Internet Explorer, the free disk space of the PC must be 2
or more times the size of the file to be downloaded.
•When download is canceled in the process of the download, it is impossible to properly play the downloaded file on a PC.
•If the recorded images are downloaded in MP4 format, add the recorder address to the trusted sites of
Internet Explorer.
Step 1
Step 4
Click the [HDD] tab on the top page (☞ Page 158) of
the operation window.
Click the [Download] button.
→→ The "Download" window will be displayed.
Step 2
Step 5
Play back the recorded images on a 1-screen.
Click the [Start] button in the download operation
area at the playback point where the download is to
start. Another way to start the download is to click
the start time box and enter date & time.
Select the file format (Original (n3r/n3a)/MP4), "With
audio" or "Without audio" to determine whether or not
to download images with audio, and select "On" or
"Off" to determine whether or not to attach an
alteration data on downloaded images due to
alternation detection. When assigning a password,
enter 5 to 8 alphanumeric characters for the password.
However, passwords cannot be assigned to MP4 files.
When the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.
→→ The date & time set in the start time box will be
displayed.
Note:
•Downloading is only available during the playback
on 1-screen display.
Step 3
Click the [End] button in the download operation area
at the playback point where the download is to end.
Another way to end the download is to click the end
time box and enter date & time.
→→ The date & time set in the end time box will be
displayed.
→→ The file download window will be displayed.
Note:
•It is possible to designate up to 60 minutes of the
time range per download.
181
Note:
•Images recorded in H.264 or H.265 can be downloaded in MP4 format. If audio is recorded in
AAC-LC and "With audio" is selected, the images
are downloaded in MP4 format with audio.
[Operation via PC web browser]
Step 6
Operate it following the instructions on the web
browser.
→→ Recorded images and audio will be downloaded
as an image data file (filename.n3r) and an audio
data file (filename.n3a) respectively, or as an MP4
file (filename.mp4).
Note:
•Copying (☞ Page 143) and downloading in MP4
format are available for up to 2 users at the same
time.
•When "Original (n3r/n3a)" and "With audio" is
selected, the "Download" window will be displayed again after the download is complete.
•If a message is displayed on the information bar,
see page 206.
182
[Operation via PC web browser]
Check a list of copied recorded images
Display a list of data (recorded images) copied on the external storage device and confirm them. It is possible
to search for copied data using filters. Available filters are "Date & time range" and "Camera".
Step 1
Insert the external storage device on which the
recording data is copied.
Step 2
Click the [Control] tab on the top page (☞ Page 158)
of the operation window.
[Date & time range]
Select a time range by designating a start and end
date & time. The designated time range will be
searched.
[File format]
Searches for images recorded with each selected file
format. Select the desired file format.
Step 5
Step 3
Select [USB] for "Disk/Medium" in the [Search] box,
and then click the [Copy data] button.
Click the [OK] button.
→→ Copied data matching the search criteria will be
displayed on the list display window.
→→ The copy data search window will be displayed.
Step 4
Specify the search conditions (filters).
[Total]
Displays the total number of searched data. When
more than 10001 data matched, the "> 10000" indication will be displayed.
[All list] button
Cancels filtering and displays all recording events.
[Refresh] button
Updates the list to the latest one.
[Prev page (<)] button
Displays the previous page.
[Camera]
Searches for images recorded with each selected
camera. Mark the checkbox corresponding to the
desired camera. When the checkbox for [All] is
marked, the checkboxes of all cameras can be
marked.
[Next page (>)] button
Displays the next page.
[Date]
Start time of recording will be displayed.
183
[Operation via PC web browser]
[Cam]
The camera number of the recorded data will be displayed.
[Evt]
Event type will be displayed. (☞ Page 175)
[Format]
Displays a file format.
Important:
•Do not remove the external storage device during
playback of copied data on the external storage
device. Otherwise the data stored on the external
storage device could be lost.
Note:
•When copying large amounts of data, more time is
needed to display the list.
•If you check the list of another external storage
device, select the "HDD" on [Disk/Medium] of
[Search] box and then select "USB" again.
•Refer to page 185 for information on how to play
copied images.
184
[Operation via PC web browser]
Play back the copied/downloaded images on a PC
The original file or MP4 file is copied to the destination when the playback image is copied or downloaded. It is
possible to play, save and print the copied/downloaded data files using the dedicated viewer software.
The MP4 file can be played on the general playback software.
To play recorded images copied on the media device
The executable file of the viewer software (NX_Viewer.exe) is also saved directly under the drive when images
are copied to the medium.
Double click the executable file to launch the viewer software when you play the copied images in the medium.
Refer to page 187 for how to use the viewer software.
Play recorded images downloaded using a web browser
The viewer software together with ActiveX are installed on a PC used for downloading images (☞ Page 157).
To play back images downloaded from the web browser, start the installed viewer software. If another PC is
used for playback, it is necessary to download the viewer software and install it on the PC.
Refer to page 187 for how to use the viewer software.
Download the viewer software
Step 1
Click the [Viewer] button in the download operation
area on the top page (☞ Page 158) of the operation
window. (☞ Page 163)
→→ The file download window will be displayed.
Step 2
Select "Save as" with the ▼ button on the right of the
[Save] button.
→→ The window to specify the save destination will be
displayed.
Step 3
Select a desired directory and click the [Save] button.
→→ The viewer software will be downloaded.
185
[Operation via PC web browser]
Install the viewer software
When the older version of the viewer software is installed on a PC, uninstall it before installing the newer version.
Step 1
Double-click the downloaded file (wvasetupnx.exe).
→→ The installer launches. Follow the instructions of
the installation wizard.
Note:
•If agreed to the displayed license agreement,
select "I accept the terms in the license agreement".
Step 2
Click the [Install] button.
→→ The Installation will start. When installation is
complete and the completion window is displayed, click the [Finish] button.
Note:
•When the viewer software is installed, the ActiveX
control will be installed at the same time.
Uninstall the viewer software
Step 1
Open "Program and functions" in "Control Panel".
Step 2
Select "WebVideo ActiveX NX" (the program to be
deleted) from the presently installed programs, and
then right-click on it. Select "Uninstall" from the displayed right-click menu.
→→ The uninstaller launches.
Step 3
Complete the uninstallation by following the instructions of the wizard.
Note:
•When the viewer software is uninstalled, the
ActiveX control will be uninstalled at the same
time.
186
[Viewer software]
How to use the viewer software
Select "NX_Viewer" from the start menu ("All programs" – "Panasonic" – "Network Disk Recorder" –
"NX_Viewer") or double-click the NX_Viewer icon on the desktop.
For images copied on the USB medium or the external storage device, double-click the execution file
(NX_Viewer.exe) to launch (refer to page 185 for the destination of the execution file).
Note:
•The license agreement window will be displayed when you first launch the viewer. The viewer software is
launched when you accept the license agreement.
Playback operation
button
Search box
Image display
area
List display
area
Playback operation window when images are displayed on a full screen
Important:
•The viewer software requires a license for each PC. The recorder has the license for 1 PC. Additional
licenses are required when you use the viewer software with more than 2 PCs at the same time. Contact
your dealer for the license.
187
[Viewer software]
Select playback images
Step 1
Click the [ ] button.
→→ The "Open" window will be displayed.
Note:
•When you run the executable file copied to the
external storage device, the file open window will
be automatically displayed.
Step 2
Select the image data file (filename.n3r, filename.
mp4), and click the [Open] button.
→→ The information on the file selected in the list display area will be displayed.
Recording date and time: Displays a start time and
an end time for copying the recorded images.
Recording CH: Displays the camera number.
Note:
•It is possible to select multiple files (up to 100
files) by clicking the desired files while holding
down the [Ctrl] key or the [Shift] key and display
all of them in a list by drag & drop.
•Do not change the file name of the copied or
downloaded image data. If the file name is
changed, the file information will not be displayed
correctly.
•The image data file can be selected by dragging
and dropping the file on the viewer software without opening the file open window.
•The files can be sorted by start date & time in
ascending or descending order by clicking the
header of the list display area,
•To add image data to the list display area, rightclick the list and select [Add file] from the menu
displayed. When the window for opening files is
displayed, proceed to Step 2. The image data is
added to the list.
•When the number of displayed image data files
has reached 100, no more files can be added. The
number of the image data is displayed on the top
of the list.
•Clicking the [ ]button will delete all data displayed on the list. Another way to clear the list is
to right-click the list and select [Clear all list].
Playback downloaded images
Use the playback operation button to play downloaded images. If the same camera channel is displayed on the
list, the next list image in playback mode or the previous list image in reverse playback mode will be played
back consecutively. If the same camera channel is not displayed on the list, playback will stop, the image display area will turn black and playback will be paused.
Note:
•If a password is given to the data or the file is encrypted, the password will be required. The image will be
played only when the correct password is confirmed.
•When a web browser and the viewer software are running at the same time, audio may not be played properly. To play audio correctly, use either the web browser or the viewer software and close the other.
•Playback images and audio may sometimes not be synchronized exactly.
The playback operation buttons enable the following operations.
[Play] button
: Starts the playback.
[Rev play] button
[FF] button
[FR] button
[Pause] button
[Next image] button
[Prev image] button
[Next record] button
[Prev record] button
: Plays the image backwards.
: Plays the image at high speed.
: Plays the image backwards at high speed.
: Pauses the playback.
: Moves to the next image. It is operable only when playback is paused.
: Returns to the previous image. It is operable only when playback is paused.
: Plays the next recording file on the list.
: Plays the previous recording file on the list.
188
[Viewer software]
The playback position can be changed with the slider bar. When the slider bar is moved, the image will be
paused. Restart the playback with the [Play] button.
Change the playback time and date
Play image recorded at a designated date & time
Selecting a date from the calendar, assigning time and a recording channel and clicking the [Search and play]
button will start to play the image of the assigned date and time.
The filtered date is displayed with a red circle on the calendar.
Play an image by selecting it from the list
Selecting a line on the list will play the image of the selected date and time, and the recording channel.
Clicking it will pause playback at the first image and double-clicking will start the playback.
Make the image easy to see
Display enlarged images
When setting a cursor on the image display and manipulating the mouse wheel, digital zoom is displayed.
Clicking the image during zoom display changes the screen center to the clicked position.
Change the display size
Enlarges the window screen display.
Returns the enlarged window screen display to the original size.
Display the image maximized to the whole window.
The maximized image to the whole window is returned to the original by the [Back] button or the [Esc] key.
Change the display format
Displays the image in the screen with the aspect ratio kept.
Displays the image with it expanded or contracted to fit in the screen.
Displays 1 pixel of the screen on 1 dot.
When you click the image in the screen of pixel by pixel, the center position changes to the point where you
have clicked.
Smooth the high-speed playback
Checking the box enables a smooth, high-speed playback.
The fast playback speed may be limited depending on the performance of the PC in use or process status.
Plays the fisheye image of the fisheye network camera (made by Panasonic, hereinafter called "fisheye
camera")
When you select a fisheye image which can be corrected, the image will be corrected and displayed on
1-screen PTZ/4-screen PTZ.
After clicking the image during corrected display on 1-screen PTZ/4-screen PTZ, the clicked position will be
centered on the screen.
Returns the image to the fisheye image.
Corrects the image on 1-screen PTZ.
Corrects the image on 4-screen PTZ.
189
[Viewer software]
Adjust the volume
When the audio data is available, a button to adjust the audio will be displayed.
Adjusts the volume. Clicking the button can switch the volume in three levels.
Toggles Audio playback/Silent.
If the audio is controlled or adjusted by another application, the audio may not be played correctly on the
viewer software. To play the audio correctly, adjust the audio only with the viewer software.
Detect alteration of the image data
It is possible to detect alteration in downloaded data to which a code for alteration detection has been attached.
Confirm whether the played image has been altered or not by the following procedures.
Step 1
Step 2
Select the data to detect alteration on the list and
button.
click the
→→ File advanced window will be displayed.
Select the [Check alteration] and click the [Execute]
button.
→→ Starts alteration detection and displays the results
once the detection has been completed.
Save still images
Save an image displayed in the image display area as a JPEG file on a PC.
: Saves the image on pause in JPEG file with a new name.
Save image data (copy)
Save selected image data in any folder on the PC.
Step 1
Step 3
Right-click the list and select [File advanced function]
from the displayed menu.
→→ File advanced window will be displayed.
Designate the folder name and destination drive and
click the [Save] button.
→→ Starts saving the image data and displays results
once the saving has been completed.
Step 2
Select the [File output] and click the [Execute] button.
→→ The "Save As" window will be displayed.
Print the displayed image
Print the image displayed in the image display area.
: Prints the image on pause with the date and time.
190
Note:
•Select [File output (Decryption)] if you save data
after decrypting it.
[Setup on browser]
Setup
Basic operations
Step 1
Click the [Setup] tab.
Step 3
Click the button for the desired submenu.
Step 4
Configure each setting item. Click the [Set] button
after completing the settings.
→→ The settings will be applied. When moving to
another page without clicking the [Set] button, the
configured settings will be canceled.
Important:
•If the settings are applied, other login users will be
forcibly logged out.
•If the settings relating to the user management are
applied, all login users will be forcibly logged out.
•Recording may not be performed for around 4
seconds just after the settings are applied.
Step 2
Click the button for the desired menu.
Configure the settings
It is possible to configure the settings of the recorder using a web browser.
Refer to page 77 for setup items that can be configured from the web browser and their further information.
191
[Setup on browser]
Set the web browser [Web browser]
Set the settings related to the display of the web browser such as a group title of the camera.
Click the [Monitor] button on the setup menu and then click the [Web browser] tab.
[Grouping]
Assign the camera to each group (G1 ~ G8).
Group display of camera tree
[Group display]
Set whether to use the group display or not.
On: Uses the group display.
Off: Does not use the group display.
Default: Off
[Group title]
Enter a group title to display for each group (G1 ~ G8)
(within 16 characters).
Update the firmware
To update the firmware of the recorder to the latest version, proceed as follows.
Refer to page 68 for the operation procedures if the software is saved on the USB medium.
Step 1
Download the firmware of the latest version onto a
hard disk drive of a PC.
Step 3
Designate the downloaded firmware by clicking the
[Browse...] button of "Firmware update".
Step 2
Click the [Maintenance] button and then click the
[System management] tab.
Step 4
Click the [Execute >] button.
→→ The confirmation window will be displayed to start
the update procedure.
Note:
•Depending on the firmware to be updated, it may
take up to 30 minutes for upgrading, leaving the
start screen displayed.
•Contact your dealer for further information about
the firmware update.
192
Notification by e-mail
Alarm mail
The camera/PC port address are indicated in an alarm mail as follows.
Contents of the alarm mail (example)
In NWDR (192.168.0.250), alarm was occurred.
Occurrence date and time: xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx GMT+xx:xx (Example. 2016-11-18 12:00:00 GMT+9:00)
Alarm descriptions:Alarm descriptions, camera channel or alarm number will be described.
(Example: SITE ALARM 5ch)
URL:http://192.168.0.250/
Warning mail
The following mail will be sent to notify of a trouble occurrence to a registered address when the trouble
occurs.
NWDR (192.168.0.250) Status notification
Occurrence date and time: xxxx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx GMT+xx:xx (Example. 2016-11-18 12:00:00 GMT+9:00)
Status: MAIN THERMAL ERROR
Indication
Date & time
Status
Description
Date & time when the trouble occurred will be displayed.
The description of the trouble will be displayed. xxx indicates the camera number, x indicates the unit
number, y indicates the HDD number
Thermal error:
Main unit: MAIN THERMAL ERROR
Extension unit: EXTx THERMAL ERROR
HDD smart warning:
Main unit: MAIN-y SMART WARNING
Extension unit: EXTx-y SMART WARNING
HDD slow response:
Main unit: MAIN-y SLOW RESPONSE
Extension unit: EXTx-y SLOW RESPONSE
HDD hour meter warning:
Main unit: MAIN-y HOUR METER WARNING
Extension unit: EXTx-y HOUR METER WARNING
Auto remove of link:
Main unit: MAIN LOGICALLY REMOVED
Main unit: MAIN-y LOGICALLY REMOVED
Extension unit: EXTx LOGICALLY REMOVED
Extension unit: EXTx-y LOGICALLY REMOVED
Fan error:
Main unit: MAIN FANy ERROR
Extension unit: EXTx FANy ERROR (y indicates the fan number)
NW camera error detection:
CAM xxx COMMUNICATION ERROR
NW camera error detection (audio):
CAM xxx COMMUNICATION ERROR(AUDIO)
NW camera error recovery:
CAM xxx COMMUNICATION RECOVERED
NW camera error recovery (audio):
CAM xxx COMMUNICATION RECOVERED(AUDIO)
Video loss detection (encoder):
CAM xxx VIDEO LOSS
Video loss recovery (encoder):
CAM xxx VIDEO RECOVERED
NW camera error detection (video):
CAM xxx COMMUNICATION ERROR(VIDEO)
NW camera error recovery (video):
CAM xxx COMMUNICATION RECOVERED(VIDEO)
HDD remove error:
Main unit: MAIN-y SWAP WARNING
Extension unit: EXTx-y SWAP WARNING
193
Indication
Status
Description
Format error:
RAID1 1down:
RAID5 1down:
RAID5 2down:
RAID6 1down:
RAID6 2down:
RAID6 3down:
Mirroring recovery failure:
RAID5 Recovery failure:
RAID6 Recovery failure:
Copy media FULL:
Number of data on the copy medium
exceeded:
Starting mirroring recovery:
Complete mirroring recovery:
Starting RAID5 recovery:
Starting RAID6 recovery:
Complete RAID5 recovery:
Complete RAID6 recovery:
Network link down detection:
Camera SD memory card error:
Camera SD memory write start command
error:
Camera SD memory write completion
command error:
Camera SD List failure:
Camera SD Image acquisition failure:
Camera SD Image delete failure:
Camera SD Accumulated recording time
warning:
Camera SD Overwrite warning:
Camera SD Access error:
Camera failure (*):
Exchange notification of wiper rubber of
camera (*):
* For WV-SUD638 camera only
Main unit: M
AIN-y SINGLE FORMAT ERROR
MAIN-y,y FORMAT ERROR
MAIN RAID5 FORMAT ERROR
MAIN RAID6 FORMAT ERROR
Extension unit: E
XTx-y SINGLE FORMAT ERROR
EXTx-y,y FORMAT ERROR
EXTx RAID5 FORMAT ERROR
EXTx RAID6 FORMAT ERROR
MAIN-y,y RAID1 1 DOWN
EXTx-y,y RAID1 1 DOWN
MAIN RAID5 1 DOWN
EXTx RAID5 1 DOWN
MAIN RAID5 2 DOWN
EXTx RAID5 2 DOWN
MAIN RAID6 1 DOWN
EXTx RAID6 1 DOWN
MAIN RAID6 2 DOWN
EXTx RAID6 2 DOWN
MAIN RAID6 3 DOWN
EXTx RAID6 3 DOWN
MAIN-y,y MIRROR RECOVERY FAILURE
EXTx-y,y MIRROR RECOVERY FAILURE
MAIN RAID5 RECOVERY FAILURE
EXTx RAID5 RECOVERY FAILURE
MAIN RAID6 RECOVERY FAILURE
EXTx RAID6 RECOVERY FAILURE
COPY MEDIUM FULL
OVER LIMITATION ON COPY MEDIUM
MAIN-y,y MIRROR RECOVERY START
EXTx-y,y MIRROR RECOVERY START
MAIN-y,y MIRROR RECOVERY COMPLETE
EXTx-y,y MIRROR RECOVERY COMPLETE
MAIN-y RAID5 RECOVERY START
EXTx-y RAID5 RECOVERY START
MAIN-y RAID6 RECOVERY START
EXTx-y RAID6 RECOVERY START
MAIN RAID5 RECOVERY COMPLETE
EXTx RAID5 RECOVERY COMPLETE
MAIN RAID6 RECOVERY COMPLETE
EXTx RAID6 RECOVERY COMPLETE
NETWORK LINK ERROR
CAM xxx SD ERR
CAM xxx SD START ERR
CAM xxx SD END ERR
CAM xxx GET LIST ERR
CAM xxx GET IMG ERR
CAM xxx DEL IMG ERR
CAM xxx SD LIFE WARNING (LONG-TERM)
CAM xxx SD LIFE WARNING (OVER-REWRITTEN)
CAM xxx SD ACCESS ERROR
CAM xxx HARDWARE ERROR
CAM xxx REPLACE WIPER RUBBER
194
Addendum
In combination with the network microphone
This section provides an explanation of how to use the network microphone with NX300 in connection with the
fisheye network camera (hereinafter referred to as "fisheye camera").
Audio recording and playback using the network microphone
The audio input to the network microphone will be recorded as the audio of the fisheye camera. Also, the audibility around the specified location can be improved while live images are displayed.
Important:
•The registration is required for both microphone and fisheye camera. The registration of the network microphone by itself cannot perform recording or audio output.
•Operation with the network microphone is allowed only when the image compression method of the fisheye
camera is selected for H.264.
•Sound pick up is still available outside the specified location.
Supported microphones (As of September, 2017)
WV-SMR10
V1.10 or later
Compatible cameras (As of September, 2017)
WV-SW458 series
WV-SF438
WV-SF448E
WV-SFN480
WV-SFV481
V1.55 or later
V1.55 or later
V1.55 or later
V1.11 or later
V1.11 or later
195
Register the network microphone
Step 1
Register the network microphone and the fisheye
camera with the recorder.
The network microphone can be registered via Network in the same manner as the Panasonic cameras.
Note:
•Registration of a network microphone occupies
one camera registration field in the setup window.
•When a network microphone is detected, its ID
(last 4 digits of the MAC address) will be displayed
in "Results".
Step 2
Select a camera number of the fisheye camera in
"Audio" of "Advanced recording setup".
Important:
•Set the connection method of the recorder and
the fisheye camera to HTTP. If HTTPS is set, the
audio of the fisheye camera cannot be recorded.
(☞ Operating Instructions Secure Communication Kit)
196
Note:
•Only the camera number registered in the
"Fisheye" (FE), "Fisheye + Double Panorama"
(FE+DP), "Fisheye + Quad PTZ" (FE+4PTZ), or
"Panorama" (P) mode of the fisheye camera can
be selected.
•The same fisheye camera cannot be selected for
"Audio" of the multiple network microphones.
•Automatically "On" will be set for the "Audio" of
the fisheye camera selected by "Audio" of the network microphone.
•Automatically "Off" will be set for "Audio" of the
fisheye camera deselected by "Audio" of the network microphone.
•The network microphone will perform audio
recording according to the schedule of the
selected fisheye camera.
•Even if RTSP is set for the connection between
the recorder and the fisheye camera, the connection with the network microphone will be RTP.
Adjust the sensitivity of the network microphone
Step 1
Click the [Setup >] button of "Microphone sensitivity"
in the [Camera setup] tab.
[Back] button
Click the button after completing the settings. The
screen returns to the [Camera setup] tab.
Step 2
Set the "Microphone sensitivity", mark the "Select"
checkbox, and then click the [Transmission] button.
→→ The setting will be applied to the selected microphones, and transmission result will be displayed
in "Results".
[Microphone sensitivity]
Set up the sensitivity of each network microphone
according to the installation environment.
Microphone sensitivity: 0 High sensitivity/ 1/ 2/ 3
Default/ 4/ 5 Low sensitivity
[Transmission] button
Transmits the setting of the microphone sensitivity to
the network microphone. Once transmission is completed and the setting is applied to the network
microphone, "OK" will be displayed in "Results". If
the display reads "Authentication error", etc., the
microphone connection or the setting may have
failed.
197
Hear audio from the main monitor
The audio will be output when a fisheye camera connected with a network microphone is selected in the main
monitor. Non-directional audio will be output in the default state.
Important:
•The audio of the network microphone cannot be heard on a web browser.
•The audio cannot be heard by selecting a camera number with which a network microphone is registered.
•When the network microphone is used in the multicast transmission, the audio of the live image will not be
output.
The recording indicator of the camera number with which network microphone is registered will not be displayed in the operation panel in the control screen and the wide view.
Example) When a network microphone is registered with Camera 2
Set up the sound collecting position
The sound collecting position of the network microphone can be set during the live image display, playback, or
media playback.
Important:
•The sound collecting position can be specified only when fisheye images are displayed. When other than
fisheye images are displayed, the position specified on the image and the sound collecting position will not
be consistent.
•During compensation display of the fisheye image, the audio will be output based on the position specified
with the fisheye image.
Step 1
During media playback
Switch to 1-screen of the fisheye camera for which
sound collecting position to be set.
During live image display
Note:
•During multiscreen or wide view display, the
sound collecting position cannot be set.
•The [Mic setup] button is enabled only when
images are displayed on 1-screen in the control
screen.
•The audio of the microphone is not output even if
an MP4 file is played back (medium) since the
audio of the microphone cannot be copied in MP4
format.
During playback
198
Step 2
Click the [Mic setup] button.
→→ The "Microphone setup" panel will be displayed.
[Mic Directionality]
The sound directionality can be set up.
Off: No directionality
On: Directionality set over a specified sound
collecting position
The sound collecting position will be displayed on the
camera image with
icon.
To change the sound collecting position, click on the
image at any place where you wish to hear a sound.
Note:
•The directionality of the microphone and the
sound collecting position are memorized per camera number.
•The directionality of the microphone and the
sound collecting position are retained even if the
recorder is rebooted (however note that changing
the camera registration or initializing the settings
will reset all the settings).
•If clicked on a place beyond the setting range, the
sound collecting position will not be changed.
•The icon which indicates the sound collecting
position will appear only when the microphone
setup panel is displayed and "On" is selected for
the directionality of the microphone.
•Non-directional sound may be played if the network microphone has not been registered with the
corresponding camera number.
199
Hear audio from PC
The copied/downloaded data files can be played using the dedicated viewer software.
When the audio from the network microphone is recorded to the audio data (filename.n3a), audibility around the
specified location can be improved with the mouse operation on the image.
•The audibility can be adjusted with the "Voice
clear" setting.
OFF: Not adjustable
Low: Low effect
High: High effect
•The audio noise reduction function will always be
enabled if "Noise Reduction" is marked.
Step 1
To specify a sound collecting position, click the
button. (The
button will be displayed when playback is started.)
→→ The menu for setting the sound collecting position
will be displayed.
Step 2
When the fisheye images of the fisheye camera are
displayed in 1-screen PTZ/4-screen PTZ with compensation, the audio from the network microphone
will be output at the sound collecting position previously specified with the fisheye image. To change the
position, return to the fisheye image display.
The sound collecting position can be specified at two
and/or
is clicked,
points at maximum. When
the icon will be displayed on the screen. Drag the
icon and drop it at a desired location.
→→ The audibility of the place where the icon is
dropped will be improved.
Note:
•For the image data with no audio from the network microphone is recorded, the
button will
not be displayed.
•Since the audio of the microphone cannot be copied
in MP4 format, the
button will not be displayed
even when an MP4 format file is played back.
•When "Aspect" is selected for the display format,
the
button will be displayed.
200
Concurrent user license function
This section explains how to use the concurrent user license function in the recorder.
Supported software version
The function is available when the software version is V2.0 or later.
About the concurrent user license function
Refer to the operating instructions of i-PRO Management Software WV-ASM300 for the concurrent user license
function.
About license registration
Register the license of the Concurrent User License Kit (WJ-NXC05W) to use the concurrent user license function. To register the options, the "Registration Key" that can be obtained from the Key Management System is
required. Refer to the "Activation Key Card" attached to the recorder for how to obtain the registration key.
Refer to [Registration of license] for license registration of the concurrent user license function.
Check the client information connected to the recorder
Displays a list of i-PRO management software (Client) information connected to the recorder. Click the [Extra
function] - the [Concurrent user license] tab of the [Advanced setup] on the setting menu.
→→ The concurrent user license screen will be displayed.
Login: The client has logged in.
Logout: The client has logged out and ended use. Other clients can connect.
Time out: The client has timed out and ended use. Other clients can connect.
201
Troubleshooting
Before asking for repairs, check the symptoms with the following table.
Contact your dealer if a problem cannot be solved even after checking and trying the solution in the table or a
problem is not described below.
Symptom
Cause/solution
Recording cannot be performed.
•Is "On" is selected for "Recording mode"?
Check whether the settings are appropriate.
43
•Are the settings of the schedules appropriate?
Check whether the settings are appropriate.
36
•Are there any recorded images on the hard disk drives?
Check if there are recorded images.
72
Cannot play back images.
Audio is not output from the camera.
Or audio is accompanied by noise.
Cannot control the cameras.
The message "Please insert a
medium." is displayed even after an
external storage device is inserted.
Reference
•Users who have logged into the system may not be
authorized to playback images recorded on the hard
disk drives.
Check the user level settings of these users.
58
•Users who have logged into the system may not be
authorized to display the images from cameras.
Check the user level settings of these users.
58
•Is the audio encoding format of the camera set to
"G.726(32kbps)" or "AAC-LC(64kbps)"?
This recorder supports "G.726(32kbps)" or "AACLC(64kbps)" only. Check the setting of the connected
camera.
−
•Is other than "Selected camera" selected for "Audio
output camera" in the "Monitor" - "Advanced setup"
tab?
Check whether the setting is appropriate.
49
•Check whether the camera numbers and IP addresses
that are displayed on the setup menu - the "Basic
setup" menu - the [Camera] page - [Camera registration] tab.
12
•Check if the user name and password has correctly
been entered on the setup menu - the "Basic setup"
menu - the [Camera] page - [Camera registration] [Registered information] tab.
15
•After the external storage device is inserted, it may take
time to recognize the medium. Close the message window and wait for a while before retry.
202
−
Symptom
Cannot access from the web
browser.
Cause/solution
Reference
•Is the Ethernet cable firmly connected to the 10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-T port on the rear side?
Confirm the cable is firmly connected.
Installation
Guide
•Is the connection indicator of the network port lit on the
rear side?
When it is not lit, connection to a LAN is not estabInstallation
lished or a network is not working correctly.
Guide
Confirm that the connection indicator of the network
port is lit. Refer to the system administrator if it is not
lit.
•Is the valid IP address set?
Refer to a system administrator for further information
about the settings.
50
•Are you accessing the wrong IP address?
Check the connection by using a ping command from
the PC command prompt as follows.
>ping "IP address of this unit" If there is reply from this
unit, the connection is normal. If not, check the settings of the IP address and the subnet mask.
−
•Is the same IP address provided to other devices?
Refer to a system administrator for further information
about the settings.
50
•Are there contradictions between the address and the
network subnet to be accessed?
When the recorder and the client (PC) are on the same
subnet, is the same subnet set for the IP addresses of
the recorder and the PC? Or is "Use Proxy Server" for
the settings of the browser checked? When accessing
the recorder in the same subnet, entering the address
of the recorder in the "Don’t Use Proxy For These
Addresses" box is recommended.
50
•Depending on the traffic of the network, there might be
difficulties in displaying images. Press the [F5] button
on the keyboard to request images.
−
•Isn't the network traffic heavy?
These symptoms may occur when the network traffic
is heavy.
−
•It may be possible that a pop-up blocker other than
Internet Explorer is activating. Check the installed software and cancel the pop-up blocker.
−
The image displayed on the
browser is not being refreshed.
Image refresh of the browser is
slow.
Response of the browser is slow.
A pop-up is not displayed on the
browser.
Cannot close the authentication
window displayed when displaying
the operation window.
•Are the correct user name and password entered?
Confirm the correct user name and password.
59
Audio is interrupted during playback using the viewer software.
•When playing images recorded at a higher frame rate,
audio may sometimes be played interrupted.
−
Cannot play the downloaded
recorded images.
•When any setting of the setup menu has been changed
during the download, the download will be canceled
automatically. In this case, the downloaded file is not a
complete file and it is impossible to play it.
−
203
Symptom
An error message is displayed when
trying to launch the viewer software
by dragging and dropping multiple
files onto it.
When displaying images on a multiscreen of the browser, images from
two cameras or more are displayed
in sequence on a screen of multiscreen.
The external storage device is not
recognized.
Cause/solution
•Decrease the number of the selected files or select files
after launching the viewer software.
•This may occur due to the display adapter and driver
combination. When this occurred, update the driver of
the display adapter to the latest version first.
• If updating the driver does not solve the problem,
adjust the hardware acceleration as follows. The
following are descriptions when using Windows 7.
1. After closing all web browser windows, right-click on
the desktop and select "Screen resolution" from the
displayed pop-up menu.
2. Click "Advanced settings" on the "Screen resolution"
window.
3. Select the [Troubleshoot] tab, and click the [Change
settings] button.
4. Disable the DirectDraw acceleration by adjusting the
performance level of "Hardware acceleration" on the
"Display Adapter Troubleshooter" window.
•Is the connected external hard disk drive or USB memory compatible with USB 3.0 or 2.0?
•Is the external storage device formatted in exFAT, FAT
(FAT16) or FAT32?
If the capacity of the external storage device is 32 GB
or less, the device must be formatted in FAT32. If it is
64 GB or more, the device must be formatted in exFAT.
•Is the external storage device equipped with the password authentication function?
•Is the connected hard disk drive run by USB bus
power? The protection circuit function activates and
the power supply will be stopped. Make sure to use the
hard disk drive that runs using external power source.
•If the recorder is started up with a USB cable connected, in rare cases, the external storage device may
not be recognized. Connect the cable after starting up
the recorder.
204
Reference
−
−
Symptom
Cause/solution
Reference
When opening the web browser of
the camera from the setup menu of
the web browser, H.264 images or
H.265 images are not displayed.
•The port forwarding function of this recorder is available only in HTTP traffic and therefore, images are not
displayed. To display images, access the address of
the camera directly in the web browser.
53
The live image or the playback
image turns to the black screen on
the web browser.
•The PC memory may be insufficient. End the web
browser and unnecessary software, launch the web
browser again and then connect to the recorder.
−
“SSL communication unavailable”
was displayed in the connection
error information on [Extra function]
– [Security] setting screen after
selecting HTTPS for the connection
with the camera.
•Follow the procedures below.
• Click [Setup >] button of [Security between this
product and camera] – [Connection] item on [Extra
function] – [Security] setting screen.
• Confirm that the connection of the camera is set to
HTTPS and the port number to 00443. If the port
number is wrong, set it to 00443.
• End the setting.
•If the problem is not solved, further perform the following procedures.
• Click [Security between recorder and camera] –
[Connection] item button on [Extra function] –
[Security] setting screen and set the connection of
the camera to HTTP.
• Click [Setup >] of [Registered information] on
[Camera] – [Camera registration] setting screen.
• Confirm that the camera port number is set to
00080. If the port number is wrong, set it to 00080.
• End the setting and open the setting screen again.
• Click [Setup >] button of [Security between this
product and camera] – [Connection] item on [Extra
function] – [Security] setting screen and reset the
connection of the camera to HTTPS.
−
The data size displayed in the copy
panel differs from the data size
which is actually copied.
•The data size displayed in the copy panel is approximate. Errors will increase if audio data is recorded.
Panasonic network microphones in particular produce
a large amount of data, so more errors tends to occur.
Make sure to copy data to media with enough storage
capacity.
144
Copying progress can at times stop
for a while at 99.9 %, or jump from
70 ~ 80 % to 100 %.
•If the data of a Panasonic network microphone is copied in original format, copying will continue even
though progress remains at 99.9 %, as the calculation
error of the audio data is large. Make sure to copy data
to media with enough storage capacity. Meanwhile, the
data are copied in MP4 format, the progress may suddenly change to 100 % and the copy may be complete
as the audio data is not copied if not recorded in
AAC-LC.
144
MP4 files cannot be played on the
general viewer. Only audio is
played.
•The general viewer may not support codec. In this
case, use the viewer software of the recorder.
205
185
Symptom
The "Thermal error" indication is
displayed on the main monitor.
Cause/solution
Reference
•The ambient operating temperature is +5 °C to +45 °C
{41 °F to 113 °F}. The "Thermal error" is displayed based
on the internal thermal information of the HDD. If the
"Thermal error" indication is displayed, it is recommended Installation
to change the installation environment so that the ambient
Guide
temperature is maintained at approx. +25 °C {77 °F}.
When the "Thermal error" indication is displayed frequently, contact your dealer.
•Check if the fan is malfunctioning.
92
•Check if the recorder ventilation holes or cooling fan are
Installation
blocked, and also check for dust collected around the
Guide
ventilation holes.
Message displayed on the information bar
Depending on the operation system in use, the following may occur. Follow the instructions below when the following occurred. By performing the following solutions, other applications may not be affected.
The "Information Bar" expressed in the following symptom and solutions will be displayed just below the
address bar only when there is information to communicate.
Information Bar
Symptom
Cause/solution
Reference
The following message is displayed
on the information bar.
"Pop-up blocked. To see this pop-up
or additional options, click here…"
•Click the information bar and select "Always Allow Popups from This Site". When the warning window is displayed, click the [Yes] button.
−
The following message is displayed
on the information bar.
•Click the information bar and select "Install ActiveX
"This site might require the followControl...".
ing ActiveX control: 'wvasetupnx.
Click the "Install" button on the displayed "Security
exe' from 'Panasonic Corporation'.
Warning" window.
Click here to install..."
−
The following message is displayed
on the information bar when tried to
execute a downloaded file.
"The publisher could not be verified.
Are you sure you want to run this
software?"
•Click the [Run] button.
−
Unnecessary status bar or scroll bar
is displayed on the pop-up window.
An URL is displayed on the pop-up
title bar and the title is not displayed completely.
•Click "Internet Options" on the Tools menu of Internet
Explorer, and then click the [Security] tab. Then, click
the [Custom Level…] button to open the "Security
Setting" window. Under "Miscellaneous", select
"Enable" for "Allow script-initiated windows without size
or position constraints". Click the [OK] button. When the
warning window is displayed, click the [Yes] button.
−
206
Glossary
ActiveX Control
A software module developed by Microsoft. It is used
to add functions, downloaded from a web server via
the Internet or intranet, to Internet Explorer. The
recorder uses it to display video.
Bit rate
Indicates how many bits of data can be processed or
transmitted in a unit of time. Generally, the units are in
bps, or bits per second. Used to indicate the compression rate of video and audio data, and how much
data a communications line can send and receive in 1
second.
Camera operation
Operations of the camera connected to the recorder
such as pan and tilt (horizontal and vertical position),
zooming, focusing, brightness (iris adjustment), preset motions (movement towards a set horizontal and
vertical position) and auto functions (automatic camera rotation, etc.).
Day & Night (IR/electrical)
Day & Night (IR) is a function to switch on black and
white optically with an infrared filter inserted, and Day
& Night (electrical) is a function to switch on black
and white with the image processing of the camera.
DDNS (Dynamic DNS)
A technology for dynamically translating DNS server
information to enable the transfer of only differences
in information between DNS servers (refer to "DNS").
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
A protocol that enables PCs to automatically get
information from a server needed for accessing a network.
DNS (Domain Name System)
The long lists of numbers or IP addresses that are
used in network environments are difficult to remember, which makes them impractical. This is why PCs
Emergency recording
A function to prioritize image/audio recording using
the external switch connected to the recorder for
when emergencies occur.
Event
Indicates an occurrence that causes the recorder to
take an event action. Events include terminal alarm,
command alarm and camera site alarm, etc.
Event action
A specific action to be taken at an event occurrence.
When "ALM" is selected, the occurrence of an event
is announced by displaying a notification on the monitor, lighting the status indicators and sounding the
buzzer. When "ADM" is selected, the occurrence of
an event will not be announced and only recording
and filing of event logs will be performed. Only an
event log is filed when it is set to Off.
Event recording
Function for starting recording automatically when an
event occurs. Event recording includes Pre-event
recording that records images before the event and
event recording that records images after the event.
FHD(Full HD)
Resolution with 1920×1080 pixels.
Default gateway
Network device used as a gateway for networks,
such as a local network, to access PCs on an external network.
Digital zoom
The function that enlarges live images and playback
images during playback. The digital zoom enlarges
the images by the recorder and is separate from the
zoom function included as part of the camera operations for enlarged images.
are given an easy-to-follow name (domain name)
which is converted to an IP address before they are
communicated with. The DNS provides translation
between domain names and IP addresses.
Firewall
A type of security used when accessing outside networks like the Internet. A PC is used to prevent computers outside a local network from accessing the
network.
Fisheye correction
This is a function to correct the fisheye image of the
Panasonic fisheye network camera to a 1-screen PTZ
or 4-screen PTZ image.
Frame rate (ips)
Refers to the unit that determines the smoothness
with which the recorded images are played back.
"ips" indicates the number of recorded frames in 1
second. The higher the number, the smoother the
movement, but the available recording time becomes
shorter.
207
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that is commonly used for transferring files
over the Internet.
Full duplex
Communications method that allows simultaneous
sending and receiving by transmitting in both directions using an independent sending line and receiving
line.
Global (IP) address
IP address assigned to each device connected to the
Internet that is equivalent to an address on the
Internet. IP address is required for Internet communications. In contrast, IP address freely available to
assigned to each device within an intranet is called as
"Private (IP) address".
IP address (Internet Protocol Address)
The identification number assigned to PCs connected
via IP networks such as the Internet or an Intranet, or
to individual communications devices. Do not assign
the same address to multiple devices, especially on
the Internet.
LAN (Local Area Network)
A communications network for connecting PCs, printers and other network devices in a relatively small
area such as in a building or floor of a building or
campus in which data is transferred.
MAC address (Media Access Control address)
Fixed physical address assigned to network devices.
Devices send and receive data based on this.
MJPEG
Indicates a video format to sequentially transmit
JPEG images from cameras.
Some cameras phrase this video codec as just
"JPEG".
H.264
One of the compression methods of moving images.
H.265
One of the compression methods of moving images
having a higher compression rate than H.264.
Half duplex
Communications method that switches between
sending and receiving using a single communications
line.
Multiscreen display
This product can display multiple camera simultaneously while displaying live images or playback images. Displaying of images from 4 cameras or from 16
cameras simultaneously is called as the 4-screen display or 16-screen display respectively.
NTP (Network Time Protocol)
A protocol developed to accurately maintain time
among hosts on the Internet.
HD(High Definition)
Resolution with 1280×720 pixels.
HDD
Stands for Hard Disk Drive (a high capacity storage
device). This product uses hard disk drives instead of
video tapes for recording.
HVGAW(Half VGA Wide)
Resolution with 640×360 pixels.
Panasonic alarm protocol
Sends a message to the registered address using the
Panasonic communication system when an event or
error occurs. It is also used to receive the Panasonic
alarm protocol from the camera (camera site alarm)
and operate event actions of the recorder.
Image quality
Image quality varies depending on the compression
rate. In this product, the following image qualities
(compression rates) are available and they can be
selected for each camera. XF (Extra Fine: Extra fine
quality), SF (Super Fine: Super high quality), FQ (Fine:
High quality), NQ (Normal: Standard quality)
Pillar box
A display format to which blank space is added to
both sides of the video to maintain the aspect ratio.
Internet
A global system of interconnected computer networks. It is required to contract with an Internet service provider to connect to the Internet.
POP 3
A protocol for receiving e-mail stored on a server on
the Internet or an Intranet.
Plug-in software
Small programs used to add functions to application
software.
208
RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol)
A protocol to transmit data such as audio and video
in real time using the UDP. Although data is lost or
delayed due to the UDP, the receiver plays the data
ignoring lost or delayed packets. It also enables multicast transmission of audio and video.
POP 3 Server
A server that supports POP3, currently the most
widely used mail sending protocol.
Port forwarding
A function that takes packets that arrive to a specific
port number from the Internet and forwards them to
the set camera. The recorder only forwards HTTP
packets.
RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol)
A protocol to control transmission of data which can
be delivered in real time such as audio and video. It
basically uses the TCP for the data transmission and
allows highly reliable transmission.
Port number
A sub address set below the IP address to connect
multiple parties simultaneously for communication
(TCP, UDP, etc.) on the Internet.
Schedule recording
Function that automatically starts video and audio
recording on a preset time schedule.
Primary (DNS) server
DNS servers usually have more than 2 systems and
the primary server is the main system.
Private (IP) address
IP address assigned when connecting primarily to
LAN. Private IP addresses can be assigned freely on
a network and do not require a formal application.
However, because private IP addresses cannot be
used to access the Internet, a router or other device it
is necessary to assign a global IP address.
Protocol
A set of rules that allows the exchange of data
amongst different types PCs with information. The
Internet uses the TCP/IP protocol as its base and
information is transferred following http and ftp protocols depending on the application.
QXGA
Resolution with 2048×1536 pixels.
Resolution (Image capture size)
Resolution refers to the degree of fineness and quality
of the camera pictures recorded by this product.
In this product, it indicates the number of pixels used
in the image displayed on the screen. A horizontal
resolution of 640 pixels and a vertical resolution of
480 pixels is expressed as 640×480.
Router
Placed in between different networks, a router sends
data to the proper destination via network. If data on
the network is addressed to an external network,
routers send the data to the outside of the network
after judging the optimum sending route.
SD memory backup, SD memory data
The SD memory backup is a function of the camera
to save images on the SD memory card inserted in
the camera when the recorder fails to communicate
with the camera during the set schedule. The SD
memory data means its recorded image.
Secondary (DNS) server
DNS servers usually have more than 2 systems and the
secondary server is the sub system. If there is trouble
with the primary server, the secondary server takes over.
Smart coding (GOP control)
A control method of the camera to reduce the amount
of the transmitted data by prolonging the refresh interval of the image when the motion in the image is little.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for sending e-mail on the Internet or an
Intranet. Used when transferring mail between servers or when clients send mail to the server.
SMTP authentication (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol authentication)
SMTP mail transfer protocol appended with a user
authentication function. It authenticates passwords
and user accounts between SMTP servers and clients. Both SMTP servers and clients must support
SMTP authentication.
SMTP server
A server that supports SMTP, currently the most
widely used mail transfer protocol.
209
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
A protocol for monitoring and managing networked
communications devices, such as routers, PCs, cameras and Network Disk Recorders via a network.
Subnet mask
Numerical value to define whether to use several bits
for a network address to distinguish among subnet IP
addresses in a network. According to the values,
devices can determine which part of the address is
the network address and which part is the host
address.
Subnet
A small network used as a unit of administration when
a larger network is divided into smaller networks.
Large networks in corporations, for example, the network can be broken down into smaller networks
called "subnets" to make the network more manageable and lines used more efficiently. In this case,
these smaller networks are called subnets.
VPN
Service used to make public lines as private lines.
Many companies are using this as a new medium of
communication instead of costly private lines.
Depending on service, VPN also provides a secure
line using authentication technology and encryption.
WAN
Allows physically separated PCs, such as between
the head office and a branch office, to connect via a
phone line or private line data for exchanging.
Web browser
A software application which enables to display web
pages. Microsoft Internet Explorer is one of the most
widely used web browser.
SVGA(Super VGA)
Resolution with 800×600 pixels.
SXVGA
Refers to a resolution of 1280×960 pixels.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol)
The standard network protocol for the Internet and
Intranets.
Time zone
A time zone is a region or a country that has uniform
standard time.
URL (Uniform Resource Locator)
An address for locating information resources such as
documents and images on the Internet.
USB medium
It is a removable external storage device having the
universal serial bus interface such as a USB memory
stick or an external hard disk.
VGA (Video Graphic Array)
Resolution with 640×480 pixels.
VMD (Motion detection) search
The function that automatically detects motion in
images. In this product, it is possible to search for
date & time of motion detection in recorded images.
210
For U.S. and Canada:
For Europe and other countries:
Panasonic System Communications Company of North America,
Unit of Panasonic Corporation of North America
Panasonic Corporation
www.panasonic.com/business/
For customer support, call 1.800.528.6747
Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 2T3 Canada
(905)624-5010
www.panasonic.ca
© Panasonic Corporation 2017
http://www.panasonic.com
Panasonic Corporation
Osaka, Japan
Authorised Representative in EU:
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
L1017-1127
PGQP2572YA
Download PDF
Similar pages